You are on page 1of 115

VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE

Variable Speed Drive

Programming and Software Manual


Variable Speed Drive
Programming and Software Manual
SD300_2.20

Edition: March 2017


SD30MTSW01CI Rev. C
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

PURPOSE

This manual contains important instructions for the installation and maintenance of Power
Electronics SD300 variable speed drives.

INTENDED USERS

This manual is intended for qualified customers who will install, operate and maintain Power
Electronics SD300 variable speed drives.

Only trained electricians approved by the installation company may install and
commission the drives. The instructions assume that the installer is familiar with electrical
installation rules and regulations.

REFERENCE MANUALS

The following reference guides are available for the SD300 variable speed drives:

SD300 Programming and Software Manual.


SD300 Hardware and Installation Manual.

POWER ELECTRONICS CONTACT INFORMATION

Power Electronics, S.A.


C/ Leonardo da Vinci, 24 26
46980 PATERNA
SPAIN

Tel. 902 40 20 70 (Spain) Tel. (+34) 96 136 65 57 Fax (+34) 96 131 82 01


Email: sales@power-electronics.com
Website: www.power-electronics.com

2 ABOUT
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

SAFETY SYMBOLS
Always follow safety instructions to prevent accidents and potential hazards from occurring.

In this manual, safety messages are classified as follows:

Identifies potentially hazardous situations where dangerous voltage may be


present which if not avoided could result in minor personal injury, serious
injury or death
WARNING
Be extremely careful and follow the instructions to avoid the risk of
electrical shocks.
Identifies potentially hazardous situations which if not avoided could result
in product damage or minor or moderate personal injury.
CAUTION
Read the message and follow the instructions carefully.

Identifies important measures to take in order to prevent damage


NOTICE equipment and warranty lost, as well as encouraging good use and
environmental practices.

Other symbols used in this manual for CAUTION messages are the following:

Hot surface. Be careful and follow the instructions to avoid burns and personal injuries.

Risk of fire. Be careful and follow the instructions to prevent causing an unintentional fire.

SAFETY SYMBOLS 3
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Revisions

Date Revision Description

17 / 02 / 2017 A First edition.


28 / 02 / 2017 B Changes in configuration and visualization parameters.
Misprints corrections.
31 / 03 / 2017 C Modbus address map. Misprintis corrections.

The equipment and technical documentation are periodically updated. Power Electronics reserves the right to modify all or part of the
contents of this manual without previous notice. To consult the most updated information of this product, you may access through our
website www.power-electronics.com where the latest version of this manual can be downloaded.

4 REVISIONS
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS
About this manual....................................................................................................................................... 2

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................................................................ 6

1. DISPLAY AND CONTROL UNITS ...................................................................................................... 9


1.1. Seven Segment Display .............................................................................................................. 9
1.2. LCD Display .............................................................................................................................. 11

2. STATUS MESSAGES ....................................................................................................................... 14


2.1. List of Status Messages ............................................................................................................ 14

3. WARNING & FAULT MESSAGES ................................................................................................... 15


3.1. List of Warning Messages ......................................................................................................... 15
3.2. List of Fault Messages & Troubleshooting................................................................................. 16
3.2.1. List of fault messages ....................................................................................................... 17
3.2.2. Fault troubleshooting ........................................................................................................ 19

4. VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS ............................................................................. 22


4.1. Parameters SV.1 Motor Visualization ..................................................................................... 22
4.2. Parameters SV.2 Drive Visualization ...................................................................................... 23
4.3. Parameters SV.3 External Visualization ................................................................................. 23
4.4. Parameters SV.4 Internal Visualization .................................................................................. 23
4.5. Parameters SV.5 PID Visualization ........................................................................................ 23
4.6. Parameters SV.6 Registers .................................................................................................... 23

5. DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS ..................................................................... 24


5.1. Group 0: Operation .................................................................................................................... 25
5.2. Group 1 G1: Drive dr.......................................................................................................... 25
5.3. Group 2 G2: Basic Functions bA........................................................................................ 29
5.4. Group 3 G3: Expanded Functions Ad ................................................................................ 34
5.5. Group 4 G4: Control Functions Cn..................................................................................... 39
5.6. Group 5 G5: Inputs In ........................................................................................................ 43
5.7. Group 6 G6: Outputs OU ................................................................................................... 48
5.8. Group 7 G7: Communication Bus CM ................................................................................ 52
5.9. Group 8 G8: PID AP .......................................................................................................... 54
5.10. Group 9 G9: Protections Pr ................................................................................................ 57
5.11. Group 10 G10: Second Motor M2 ...................................................................................... 62
5.12. Group 11 G11: PLC Sequence US .................................................................................... 64
5.13. Group 12 G12: PLC Function UF ....................................................................................... 65
5.14. Group 13 G13: Fault History ................................................................................................... 68

6. MODBUS COMMUNICATION .......................................................................................................... 70


6.1. Introduction................................................................................................................................ 70
6.2. Supported Modbus Function Codes .......................................................................................... 71
6.2.1. Modbus Function Code N 3: Registers Reading ............................................................. 71
6.2.2. Modbus Function Code N 16: Registers Writing .............................................................. 72
6.3. Addressing Modes ..................................................................................................................... 72
6.3.1. Broadcast Addressing Mode ............................................................................................. 72
6.4. Summary of Modbus Addresses ............................................................................................... 73
6.4.1. Common Area................................................................................................................... 73
6.4.2. Monitoring Parameters ..................................................................................................... 74
6.4.3. Control Parameters ........................................................................................................... 77
6.4.4. Memory Control Area........................................................................................................ 77
6.4.5. Programming Parameters ................................................................................................. 78
6.4.6. Visualization Parameters .................................................................................................. 93

7. CONFIGURATION REGISTER ......................................................................................................... 94

TABLE OF CONTENTS 5
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
IMPORTANT!
Read carefully this manual to maximize the performance of the product and to ensure its safe use.
In order to use appropriately the drive, please, follow all instructions described in the installation manual
referred to transport, installation, electrical connection and commissioning of the equipment.
Power Electronics accepts no responsibility or liability for partial or total damages resulting from
inappropriate equipment use.
Please, pay careful attention to the following recommendations:

WARNING

Do not run the drive with the front cover removed.


Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.

The drive does not remove the voltage from its input terminals. Before working on the drive,
isolate the whole drive from the supply.
If you do not remove the power supply, you may get an electric shock.

Do not remove the cover except for periodic inspections or wiring, even if the input power is not
applied.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.

Before opening the covers for wiring and periodic inspections, ensure DC voltage has been fully
discharged. Check with a multimeter the following measures:
Measure between the output power busbars U, V, W and the cabinet and check that the
voltage is around 0V.
Measure that the DC link terminals P2(+), N(-) and chassis voltage are below 30VDC.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.

Operate the drive with dry hands.


Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.

Do not use cables with damaged insulation.


Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.

Do not subject the cables to abrasions, excessive stress, heavy loads or pinching.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.

Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the motor while the drive is connected.

6 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

CAUTION

Install the drive on a non-flammable surface. Do not place flammable material


nearby. Otherwise, a fire could occur.

Disconnect the input power if the drive is damaged.


Otherwise, it could result in a secondary accident or fire.

Do not allow lint, paper, wood chips, dust, metallic chips or other foreign matter
into the drive. Otherwise, a fire or accident could occur.

The drive becomes hot during operation. Wait until it cools down before
performing any actions.
Touching hot parts may result in skin burns.

Do not apply power to a damaged drive or to a drive with parts missing, even if
the installation is complete.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.

NOTICE

RECEPTION
SD300 drives are carefully tested and perfectly packed before delivering.
In the event of transport damage, please ensure to notify the transport agency and POWER
ELECTRONICS: 902 40 20 70 (International +34 96 136 65 57), or your nearest agent, within 24hrs
from receiving the goods.

UNPACKING
Make sure model and serial number of the variable speed drive are the same on the box, delivery
note and unit.
Each variable speed drive is delivered with Hardware and Software technical manuals.

RECYCLING
Packing of the equipment should be recycled. For this, it is necessary to separate the different
included materials (plastic, paper, cardboard...) and deposit them on proper banks.
Waste products of electric and electronic devices should be selectively collected for their correct
environmental management.

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC)


The drive is intended to be used in industrial environments (Second Environment). It achieves
compliance with C3 category defined in IEC/EN 61800-3 standard when the installation
recommendation within this manual are followed.
Select communication and control system according to the drive EMC environment. Otherwise,
systems could suffer from interferences due to a low EMS level.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

SAFETY
Before operating the drive, read this manual thoroughly to gain an understanding of the unit. If any doubt
exists, please contact POWER ELECTRONICS, (902 40 20 70 / +34 96 136 65 57) or your nearest
agent.
Wear safety glasses when operating the drive with power applied or the front cover is removed.
Handle and transport the drive following the recommendations within this manual.
Install the drive according to the instructions within this manual and local regulations.
Do not place heavy objects on the drive.
Ensure that the drive is mounted vertically and keeping the minimum clearance distances.
Do not drop the drive or subject it to impact.
The SD300 drives contain static sensitive printed circuits boards. Use static safety procedures when
handling these boards.
Avoid installing the drive in conditions that differ from those described in the Environmental Ratings
section.

CONNECTION PRECAUTIONS
To ensure a correct operation of the drive, it is recommended to use a SCREENED CABLE for the
control wiring.
The motor cable should comply with the requirements within this manual. Due to increased leakage
capacitance between conductors, external ground fault protection threshold value should be
adjusted ad hoc.
Do not disconnect motor cables if the input power supply remains connected.
The internal circuits of the SD300 Series will be damaged if the incoming power is connected and
applied to the output terminals (U, V, W).
Do not use power factor correction capacitors banks, surge suppressors, or RFI filters on the output
side of the drive. Doing so may damage these components.
Before wiring terminals, make sure that the drive keypad display is turned off and the front cover is
off as well. The drive may hold a high voltage electric charge long after the power supply has been
turned off.

TRIAL RUN
Verify all parameters before operating the drive. Alteration of parameters may be required depending
on application and load.
Always apply voltage and current signals to each terminal that are within the levels indicated in this
manual. Otherwise, damage to the drive may occur.

EARTH CONNECTION
Ground the drive and adjoining cabinets to ensure a safe operation and to reduce electromagnetic
emission.
Connect the input PE terminal only to the dedicated PE terminal of the drive. Do not use the case,
nor chassis screws for grounding.
Ground the drive chassis through the labelled terminals. Use appropriate conductors to comply with
local regulations. The ground conductor should be connected first and removed last.
Motor ground cable must be connected to the PE output terminal of the drive and not to the
installations ground. We recommend that the section of the ground conductor (PE) is equal or
greater than the active conductor (U, V, W).

8 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

1. DISPLAY AND CONTROL UNITS


1.1. Seven Segment Display
The SD300 variable drives, up to 30kW, have a built-in seven segment display which provides intuitive
data presentation, an easy navigation through the control parameters and allows storing thousands of
user-customized configurations.

Figure 1.1 Integrated display unit

It has four indicator leds that supply information about the drive operational status, plus eight control keys.
They are described in the table below:

KEY / LED NAME FUNCTION

RUN key Run command.

STOP: Stop command during operation.


STOP/RESET key
RESET: Reset command when a fault occurs.

Used both to scroll up through the parameters of a group and to increase a


UP key
parameter value.

Used both to scroll down through the parameters of a group and to decrease a
DOWN key
parameter value.

Left key Used to jump to other parameter groups or move the cursor to the left.

Right key Used to jump to other parameter groups or move the cursor to the right.

Enter key Used to set a parameter value or to save the changed parameter value.

Used to cancel the changes or to switch from Remote/Local if this option was
Escape key
previously configured.
Illuminated during forward run.
FWD LED Forward Run
LEDS flicker when a fault occurs.
REV LED Reverse Run Illuminated during reverse run.

RUN LED Run Illuminated during operation / Flickering during acceleration/deceleration.


Illuminated during parameter setting / Flickering when the ESC key is operating as
SET LED Setting
a multi-key.
Seven-segment
Current value Indicates operating conditions and parameter data.
display

DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPAD 9


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

The following table shows the different characters of the seven-segment display:

To learn how to switch between groups and parameters, follow the next examples:

Step Instruction Keypad display

Move to the
desired group
1
using the [] & []
keys.

Move up and
down through the
2 parameters using
the [] and []
keys.

Press the [ENT]


3 key to save the
changes.

10 DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPAD


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Binary numbers are shown in the integrated display as segment lines. 1 is displayed in the top part of
the display and 0 in the bottom part. For example, 010 is represented as:

1.2. LCD Display


As an option, there is a remote LCD display for remote installation. The removable display integrates three
LEDs indicating the drive operating status, an LCD display screen with 4 lines of 16 characters and control
keypad for parameter setting and commissioning.

Figure 1.2 Removable display


LED Status Indicators
Leds show at any time, and in a comprehensive way for the user, information about output voltage or if a
fault has taken place.

LED COLOR FUNCTION


ON Yellow Switched on indicates the equipment is powered.
RUN Green Switched on indicates the motor receives voltage from the SD500.
FAULT Red Flashing indicates the equipment is in fault.

Figure 1.3 Display status indicators

DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPAD 11


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Alphanumeric LCD Display Screen


The removable display integrates a four-line LCD screen with sixteen characters per line (16x4). Each line
has different functions.

Status Line: Upper line.


Shows the drive status (RUN, STP, etc)
as well as the motor output current and speed.
It is not configurable by the user.

Display Line 1: Second screen line.


Allows the user to select the different variables
within the display menu. It is configurable by the user.

Display Line 2: Third screen line.


Allows the user to select the different variables
within the display menu.

Programming Line: Lower line


The user can view and set the different parameters.
Figure 1.4 Display lines detail

Control Keypad
The keypad items have different function depending on their individual or combined use:

Enter into a parameter group to access the subgroups. In case a group does not have
subgroups, the access would be straight to the group parameters.

To modify numeric parameters:

& Pressed simultaneously, the value increases

& Pressed simultaneously, the value decreases

To modify enumerated parameters:

By pressing this key, the extended description is shown.

Press these two keys simultaneously to switch between


&
possible values in ascending order.
Press these two keys simultaneously to switch between
&
possible values in descending order.
Scroll through the parameter groups. Within a parameter group, it is possible to browse
the different parameters in ascending order. It also allows setting (increase) the value of
configurable parameters.

Same function as the previous key, but downwards. It also allows setting (decrease) the
value of configurable parameters.

By pressing for a 2 second period (approximately), the cursor changes within the different
lines configurable by the user. It also allows to exit from a menu location to a previous one.

By pressing this key, the drive starts if it is configured in local control mode (check
equipment configuration). This button will only operate when the equipment is configured
in local control mode.

Pressing this key stops the drive if it is running. In case the equipment is at fault, pressing
this button will reset the drive whenever the fault conditions have disappeared. This button
will only work when the equipment is configured in local control.

Not used.

12 DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPAD


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

The figure below shows a programming example, following the previous explication.

Figure 1.5 Parameter navigation example

DISPLAY UNIT AND CONTROL KEYPAD 13


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

2. STATUS MESSAGES
The upper line of the display corresponds to the status line. In this line, the equipment status, motor mean
current consumption (A), and motor speed (Hz) are displayed. This line is always visible in the display screen
and cannot be modified by the user.

Figure 2.1 Description of the Status Line

Note: The user can access to the displayed information in the status line through Modbus communication. Refer to section
Modbus Communication.

2.1. List of Status Messages


Screen Name Description
FLT Fault trip The drive is in fault state

DCB DC Brake The SD300 has injected DC current to stop the motor.

STP Stopping The drive is decreasing the output frequency due to a stop order.

The drive is decreasing the output frequency. The motor is decreasing its
DCL Decelerating
speed, it is decelerating.
The drive is increasing the output frequency. The motor is increasing its
ACL Accelerating
speed, it is accelerating.
The drive is operating at reference speed. The motor will keep the introduced
RUN Running
speed. Operating in nominal rate.

RDY Ready The drive is ready for commissioning.

14 STATUS MESSAGES
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

3. WARNING & FAULT MESSAGES


3.1. List of Warning Messages
The following table summarizes the possible warning messages that may be displayed and their description.
Please notice that these messages are only shown in the integrated display.

Screen Name Description


Displayed when the motor is overloaded. Operates when Pr.17 is set to 1.
OLU Over Load To operate, select 5. Set the digital output terminal or relay OU.31or OU.33
to 5 OVERLOAD to receive overload warning output signals.
Displayed when the motor is underloaded. Operates when Pr.25 is set
ULU Under Load to 1. Set the digital output terminal or relay OU.31or OU.33 to 7
UNDERLOAD to receive underload warning output signals.
Displayed when the overload time equivalent to 60% of the drive overheat
IOLU INV Over Load protection level is accumulated. Set the digital output terminal or relay
OU.31or OU.33 to 6 IOL to receive drive overload warning output signals.
Lost command warning alarm occurs even with Pr.12 set to 0. The warning
alarm occurs based on the condition set at Pr.13 to Pr.15. Set the digital
LCU Lost Command output terminal or relay OU.31or OU.33 to 13 LOSTCOMMAND to receive
lost command warning output signals. If the communication settings and
status are not suitable for P2P, a Lost Command alarm occurs.
Displayed when an error is detected from the cooling fan while Pr.79 is set
FANU Fan Warning to 1. Set the digital output terminal or relay OU.31or OU.33 to 8 FAN
WARNING to receive fan warning output signals.
An alarm occurs when the value set at Pr.86 is less than the value set at
EFAN Fan Exchange Pr.87. To receive fan exchange output signals, set the digital output terminal
or relay OU.31 or OU.33 to 38 FAN EXCHANGE
An alarm occurs when the value set at Pr.63 is less than the value set at
Pr.62 (the value set at Pr.61 must be 2 (Pre Diag)). To receive CAP
ECAP CAP Exchange
exchange signals, set the digital output terminal or relay OU.31 or OU.33
to 36 CAP Exchange.
Displayed when the DB resistor usage rate exceeds the set value. Set the
DBU DB Warn %ED
detection level at Pr.66
Tr tune error warning alarm is activated when dr.9 is set to 4. The warning
TRTR Retry Tr Tune alarm occurs when the motors rotor time constant (Tr) is either too low or too
high.

WARNING & FAULT MESSAGES 15


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

3.2. List of Fault Messages & Troubleshooting


Whenever a fault is produced, the SD300 will stop the motor.

The lower line (programming line) of the removable display will show the fault description, while the upper
line will show the fault code and the values of current and speed at the instant the fault occurred.
Press the key to view fault details.

Figure 2.2 Fault visualization Programming Line

Without resetting the fault, it is possible to navigate and access the visualization lines parameters to find
out more information about the fault. See section Visualization and Status Parameters for details about
these parameters.
On the other hand, the FAULT led will remain enabled and the fault message displayed until the breakdown
is repaired and the equipment reset.
In the integrated display, faults are stored in parameters Pr.90 to Pr.96.

Section 3.2.1 shows a list of all possible faults. Probable causes and troubleshooting for each fault are
listed in section 3.2.2.

16 WARNING & FAULT MESSAGES


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

3.2.1. List of fault messages


Removable
display DESCRIPTION
Integrated display
F0 No Fault
The equipment is operative. No fault is present.
-
F1 OverLoad The drive trips when the output current reaches the value set in parameter G9.21 (Pr.21), exceeding
the time limit set in parameter G9.22 (Pr.22). The protection is operative if the parameter G9.20 (Pr.20)
has been set with a value different to 0 NONE.
F2 UnderLoad The motor is working with insufficient load. The drive trips when its current is within the values set in
parameter G9.29 (Pr.29) and G9.30 (Pr.30) exceeding the time limit set in parameter G9.28. The
protection will be enabled if the parameter G9.27 (Pr.27) has been set with a value different to 0 NONE.
F3 Inv OverLoad The drive cuts the output supply when the output current exceeds the value set in the corresponding
parameters (150% for 1 minute, 200% for 4 seconds of the drive rated current). The 200% for 4 seconds
can vary depending on the drives capacity.
F4 E-Thermal The internal thermo-electronic protection determines the motor overheating. If the motor is overheated,
the drive stops its output. The protection is enabled setting the parameter G9.40 (Pr.40) to a value
different than 0 NONE.
F5 Ground Fault The drive trips when an earth leakage and its current exceed the internal value configured in the drive.
The overload protection function will protect the drive from any ground fault caused by a small leakage
resistance.
F6 Output Ph Loss
One of the three output phases is open. The protection will be enabled if the parameter G9.5 (Pr.5) is
set as 1 OUTPUT or 3 ALL.

F7 Input Ph Loss
One of the three input phases is open. The protection will be enabled if the parameter G9.5 (Pr.5) is set
as 2 INPUT or 3 ALL.

F8 OverSpeed
The motor speed has reached the speed limit set in G1.20 (dr20).
-
F10 NTC
The drive uses a NTC thermal sensor to detect temperature increases within the supply system. When
this message is displayed, the thermal sensor cable may have been cut. (The drive will continue running).

F11 OverCurrent
The drive trips when the output current exceeds the 200% of the rated current value.

F12 OverVoltage The drive trips if the DC voltage within bus exceeds the value established. This value has been
established in the internal configuration during the deceleration process or when the motor regenerative
energy return to the drive is excessive for the capacitors which compose the DC bus. This fault can also
be caused due to a transitory overvoltage within the supply system.

F13 External Trip This function can be used whenever the user needs to cut the output by the use of an external trip signal.
The open /closed contact use will depend on the configuration within the digital inputs (G5.65-G5.71,
In.65-In.71) configured as 4 EXTERNAL TRIP. The drive cuts the motor output protecting it from the
controlled situation within the terminal.
F14 Short ARM
The drive trips when a short-circuit occurs in the IGBT or in the output power.

F15 OverHeat
The drive trips if overheated caused by a damaged cooling fan or by the presence of any strange
substance within the cooling system.

F20 FAN TRIP


An anomaly detecting within the cooling fan. The protection will be enabled if parameter G9.79 (Pr.79)
is set as 0 TRIP.

F22 Param_Wr_Err
A problem has been detected during the writing of a parameter by keypad.

WARNING & FAULT MESSAGES 17


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
display DESCRIPTION
Integrated display
F23 Pipe Fill Flt
An error has been detected which makes the PID feedback be always under the established value.
Possible pipe breakdown.

F25 External Brake


Drive trips when the braking unit reaches a dangerous temperature.

F26 No Motor
The drive has not detected a connected motor at its output when the Start order has been given. The
protection is enabled setting the parameter G9.31 (Pr.31) to a value different to 0 NONE.

F27 Slot 1 Fail


The optional board located in the slot1 has been extracted or there is no possible communication.

F30 STO
Automatic internal protection of several of the IGBT semiconductors has acted or the safe stop contact
of the drive (connected to an external circuit by the user) has been activated (for example, emergency
stop).

F33 BX
One of the digital inputs (G5.65-G5.71, In.65-In.71) has been enabled configured as 1 DIS START,
forcing the drive to cut the output supply and making it stop due to inertia.

F34 LV
The drive trips when the voltage within the DC bus is under the detection level. Therefore, the torque
generated can be insufficient or the motor can be overheated if the input voltage decreases.

F35 Lost Command


The drive trips due to a loss of speed set point established by the use of the control or communication
terminals.

F36 KeyPadLostCMD
Drive trips if display is not connected.
F49 ADC Error
Analog Input error.

F50 EEPROM
The (EEPROM) memory is defective.

F51 Watchdog-1 Err


Micro-controller internal fault.

F52 Watchdog-2 Err


Micro-controller internal fault.

18 WARNING & FAULT MESSAGES


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

3.2.2. Fault troubleshooting


Screen Description or possible cause Actions
F1: Over Load Elevated motor consumption caused by an
Increase the motor and drive capacity.
excessive load.
Load defined in parameter G9.21 (Pr.21) is too Increase the defined value in parameter G9.21
low (Pr.21).
F2 UnderLoad A connection problem between the motor and the Check the connection between motor and load is
load is present. correctly set.
The load defined in parameters G9.29 (Pr.29) Increase the value defined in parameters G9.29
and G9.30 (Pr.30) is too low. (Pr.29) and G9.30 (Pr.30).
F3 Inv OverLoad The load within the drive is greater than the rated
Increase the motor and drive capacity.
value of the drive.
The start torque setting is too high. Reduce the start torque value.
Motor overheated. Reduce load and / or operating cycle
F4 E-Thermal Load exceeds the drive capacity. Use a more powerful drive.
Electro-thermal protection level (ETH) too low. Set the ETH level properly.
Invalid selection of the drive rated power. Select a correct drive power.
Invalid V/f pattern setting. Select a correct V/f pattern.
F5 Ground Fault Ground leakage produced in the drive output. Check the drive output wiring.

The motor insulation is damaged due to heat. Change the motor.

F6 Output Ph Loss Problem present in the drive output electric


Check the output electric connections.
connection.
Check that the output electric distribution is
Poor output electric distribution.
correct.
Problem present in the drive input electric
F7 Input Ph Loss Check the input electric connections.
connection.
Bad input electric distribution. Check that the input electric distribution is correct.
Replace the drive DC capacitor. Contact the
The drive DC capacitor must be replaced.
Technical Service.
Speed reference is higher or equal that the speed
Check the reference source and the motor load.
F8 OverSpeed limit.
Motor speed is out of control Verify speed limits.
F10 NTC Keep the installation location at room
The room temperature is over the allowed range.
temperature within the specified limits.
Problem present in the drive internal temperature
Contact the Technical Service.
sensor.
Acceleration / deceleration time too short
Increase the acceleration /deceleration time.
compared to the load inertia.
The load exceeds the drive rated power. Increase the drive rated power.
Ensure the correct programming spin start
conditions. Set the load inertia and the
The drive attempts to start the motor while parameters which enable the speed search
F11 OverCurrent spinning. properly.
Note: Adequate spin start conditions fulfilment
depends on each installation.
Ground fault or short circuit produced. Check the output wiring.
The mechanic brake enters too quickly. Check the mechanic brake.
The power circuit components overheated due to Check the cooling fan. Verify it is correctly
a cooling fan malfunction. powered and not blocked by dirt.
Caution: Starting the drive without correcting anomalies may damage the IGBTs.

WARNING & FAULT MESSAGES 19


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Screen Description or possible cause Actions


The deceleration time is too short compared to
F12 OverVoltage Increase the deceleration time.
the load inertia.
Use an optional brake resistor (dynamic brake
Excessive energy regeneration in the drive.
units).
Line with High Voltage. Check the supply line voltage.
F13 External Trip
Delete the circuit fault connected by the input fault
External fault produced.
terminal configured.

F14 Short ARM Short circuit upper and lower IGBT. Check IGBT.
Short circuit at the drive output. Check the wiring of the drive output circuit.
Acceleration / deceleration time is too short
Increase acceleration / deceleration time.
compared with the inertia of the load (GD2)
Replace the cooling fans and / or remove the
Cooling fan damaged or foreign matter present.
foreign matter.
F15 OverHeat
Fault within the cooling system. Check the foreign matter presence.
Keep the room temperature under 50C or verify
Excessive room temperature.
the drive capacity according to temperature.
Motor overheat produced (PTC / NTC external Check the motor cooling.
signal) produced. Reduce the load and / or operating cycle.
F20 Fan Trip
Replace the cooling fans and or remove the
Cooling fan damaged or foreign matter present.
foreign matter.

F22 Param Wr Err


A problem occurred while editing a parameter
Check if the keyboard is properly inserted.
with the numeric keyboard.

Possible pipe breakdown inhibits pressure to


F23 Pipe Fill Flt Check installation pipe status.
reach the minimum level.
Check the PID feedback pressure sensor is
PID feedback sensor is not showing the correct
measuring properly. In case it is damaged,
values.
replace it.
F25 External Brake
The braking unit has reached a dangerous
Check the braking unit.
temperature.

F26 No Motor No motor connected to the drive output or Check the motor is correctly connected to the
defective wiring. drive output.
The value set in parameter G9.31 (Pr.31) is too
Reduce the parameter G9.31 (Pr.31) value.
high.
The port 1 optional board is not connected Check the board is inserted in the expansion
F27 Slot 1 Fail
properly. board slot.
Defective optional board. Replace the optional board for a new one.
Defective optional board. Replace the optional board.
F30 STO
The internal automatic protection of several
Check if the circuit is properly wired.
IGBTS or the drive safe stop contact have been
Check wiring and ensure that neither of both
activated (connected by the user to an external
circuits is open.
circuit). E.g.: Emergency stop.

F33 BX
One of the digital inputs configured as 1 DIS Disable the digital input configured as 1 DIS
START has been enabled. START.

20 WARNING & FAULT MESSAGES


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Screen Description or possible cause Actions


Low voltage in the line Check the line voltage.
F34 LV Load exceeds the line rated power (welding
machine, motor with high start current connected Increase the line rated power.
to the commercial line)
Defective magnetothermic switch in the drive
Change the magnetothermic switch.
supply circuit.
F35 Lost Command
Check the drive communications or the inputs are
Speed reference lost introduced through the
within the defined ranges to provide the speed
communications or keypad inputs.
references.

F36 KeypadLostCMD Display connection is not correct. Check the connection.


F49 ADC Error
Analog input error produced. Contact the Technical Service.

F50 EEPROM
Disconnect and reconnect the power supply. If
EEP Error (memory fault). fail, contact the Power Electronics Technical
Service.
F51 Watchdog-1 Err
Disconnect and reconnect the power supply. If
Watchdog Error (CPU fault). fail, contact the Power Electronics Technical
Service.
F52 Watchdog-2 Err
Disconnect and reconnect the power supply. If
Watchdog Error (CPU fault). fail, contact the Power Electronics Technical
Service.

WARNING & FAULT MESSAGES 21


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

4. VISUALIZATION AND STATUS


PARAMETERS
These parameters constantly indicate the input signal status and dynamic parameter status of the SD300.
Visualization lines are the second and the third lines. The user can select the parameter to be displayed in
each line from the different visualization options.

To select a display parameter, move the cursor to the second or third line. To do this, press the ESC /
key for approximately two seconds; the cursor moves from one line to the next. Once located on the second
or third line, navigate through parameter groups, enter using the key. and select the desired parameter
to be displayed. Once selected, these parameters are saved into memory and will be displayed on lines 2
and 3 whenever the drive is powered up.

Thanks to these lines user can display desired parameters and obtain additional information easily.

Figure 4.1 Visualization Lines Description

4.1. Parameters SV.1 Motor Visualization


Screen Units Description
Mtr Iout=0.0 Shows the current running through the motor, corresponding to the second field of the status
A
MTR O/P current line OFF 0.0A +0.0Hz
Mtr Freq= 0.00Hz
Hz Shows the motor frequency
Motor Frequency
Mtr Sp= 0rpm
rpm Shows the motor speed in rpm
Motor Speed(rpm)
Mtr FBSp=+0rpm Shows the motor encoder speed. This value will be only shown if an encoder board has been
rpm
MTR FBK Speed installed in the drive.
Mtr Vout=0V
V Shows the motor voltage
MTR O/P voltage
Mtr Pow = 0.00kW
kW Shows the motor instantaneous power consumption
MTR O/P power
Mtr Torq = 0.0%
% Motor torque Shows the torque applied to the motor.
MTR O/P torque

22 VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

4.2. Parameters SV.2 Drive Visualization


Screen Units Description
Bus vol = 528V
VDC Shows the DC voltage measured in the drive bus.
Bus voltage
Temperature = 27C
C Shows the internal temperature of the drive.
Temperature

4.3. Parameters SV.3 External Visualization


Screen Units Description
ANLG IN V1 = +0.00V
V Shows the voltage analog input 1 mean value.
AI V1 Monitor
ANLG IN V2 = +0.00V
V Shows the voltage analog input 2 mean value.
AI V2 Monitor
ANLG IN I2 = +0.00mA
mA Shows the current analog input 2 mean value.
AI I2 Monitor
Shows the activation or rest status of the Digital Inputs, from left to right P7 to P1. The number
DigI= 0000000
- of Digital Inputs varies depending on the equipment. IP20 drives integrate 7 Digital Inputs and
Dig I/P Status IP66 drives integrate 5.
ANL OUT1 = 0.0%
% Shows the value of the Analog Output 1.
Anl Out1 Monitor
DOstatus= 0-00
- Shows the status of the digital outputs in the following order: SD-Relay2 Relay1.
Dig Output status

4.4. Parameters SV.4 Internal Visualization


Screen Units Description
Inv.Power=
kW Shows the drive power in kW.
Inv.Power
Inv. S/W
- Shows the last software version installed in the drive Ex. 0xE6 = v2.30.
Inv.SW
SW Disp=
- Shows the last software version installed in the display.
DP version

4.5. Parameters SV.5 PID Visualization


This display group appears when the parameter G8.1 Apmod (Ap.1) has been set to the PID option.

Screen Units Description


S=0.0% F=0.0% Shows the PID set point value of the analog PID (left) and the sensor value that sends the
%
Set- Fdb PID feedback signal (right).
PID Out=+0.00%
% Shows the t PID Output.
PID Out

4.6. Parameters SV.6 Registers


Screen Units Description
Operating Time.
- Shows the total runtime in days and minutes.
Total runtime
Consumed Energy
- Shows the total consumed energy, in MWh and kWh.
Consumed Energy

VISUALIZATION AND STATUS PARAMETERS 23


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

5. DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING
PARAMETERS
The different parameters of the SD300 are organized in groups (G1, G2, G3, ) and can be set both from
the integrated display and from the removable display.

In the integrated display, use the left and right arrow keys to jump from a parameter group to another.
Use the up and down keys to navigate between the parameters of the selected group.

In the removable LCD display, configuration parameters are shown in the bottom line.

Use the plus and minus keys to jump from a parameter group to another. Press the key to
enter a group and, again, the plus and minus keys to navigate between the parameters of the
selected group. Details about each parameter can be seen by pressing the key. Please refer to section 1,
Display Unit and Control Keypad, for instructions on how to modify parameter values.

Figure 5.1 Programming Line detail.

See the following subsections for the complete parameter list for each group.

24 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

5.1. Group 0: Operation


This group is only available in the integrated display. It allows performing a basic set up of the drive with
its main parameters.

Modbus Address
Parameter Function
Decimal Hexadecimal
Target frequency =0.00Hz 47936 0h1F00 See G1.1
ACC - Acceleration time = 20.0s 47937 0h1F01 See G1.3
dEC - Deceleration time = 30.0s 47938 0h1F02 See G1.4
drv - Command source = Remote 47939 0h1F03 See G1.6
Frq - Frequency reference source = LOCAL 47940 0h1F04 See G1.7
St1 - Multi-step speed frequency 1 = 10.00Hz 47941 0h1F05 See G2.50
St2 - Multi-step speed frequency 2 = 20.00Hz 47942 0h1F06 See G2.51
St2 -Multi-step speed frequency 3 = 30.0Hz 47943 0h1F07 See G2.52
Cur - Output current 47944 0h1F08
rPM -Motor revolutions per minute 47945 0h1F09
dCL -Inverter direct current voltage 47946 0h1F0A
These values depend on drive characteristics.
vOL -Inverter output voltage 47947 0h1F0B
LuT -Out of order signal 47948 0h1F0C
drC -Select rotation direction 47949 0h1F0D

5.2. Group 1 G1: Drive dr


Removable
Name / Set on
display Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
[G1.19] to
G1.1 LCLSP=0.00Hz [1]
[G1.20] Set the motor speed value. Minimum value is set in G1.19 (dr.19) and the
Local speed YES
(dr.10 to maximum value in G1.20 (dr.20).
0.00
dr.20)
G1.2 LclTQ=0.0% -180.0 to
Local torque Set the torque value of the motor. YES
dr.2 180.0%
G1.3 ACC1=20.0s [1] Set the acceleration ramp 1, in seconds. This ramp will be set according to
Acceleration ramp 0.0 to 600.0s the requirements of each process. YES
ACC
G1.4 DECEL1=30.0s [1] Set the deceleration ramp 1, in seconds. This ramp will be set according to
Deceleration ramp 0.0 to 600.0s the requirements of each process. YES
dEC
Set the control mode to command the drive (Start/Stop, Reset...).
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
0 LOCAL Drive is controlled from the keypad.
G1.6 CONTROLMODE1= Commands are sent from the control
REMOTE [1] 1 REMOTE
terminals.
Commands are sent from the control 2
2 REMOTE 2
terminals.
Control mode 1 0 to 5 The drive is controlled through the NO
3 MODBUS communications bus, integrated in the
equipment.
The drive control is carried out by the use of
4 COMMS
any of the optional communication boards.
dru
The common area can be linked with the user
5 PLC sequence output and can be used as
command.

[1] Only displayed in the removable LCD display.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 25


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
Name / Set on
display Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
Select the source for the speed reference.
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Reference will be given by keypad and will be
0 LOCAL
set in G1.1 (dr.1) - Local Speed.
G1.7 REF1 SP= LOCAL [1] Reference will be introduced through the
2 V1
voltage analog input 1.
Reference will be introduced through the
4 V2
voltage analog input 2.
Reference will be introduced through the
5 I2
Speed reference 1 0 to 12 current analog input 2. NO
The reference will be introduced through
6 MODBUS
Modbus.
The reference will be introduced through the
8 COMMS
communications.
Frq The common area can be linked with user
9 PLC sequence output and can be used as
command.
Reference will be introduced through the Pulse
12 PULSE
input.
Select the source for the torque reference.
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Reference will be given by keypad and will be
0 LOCAL
set in G1.1 (dr.1) - Local Speed.
G1.8 REF1 TQ= LOCAL
Reference will be introduced through the
2 V1
voltage analog input 1.
Reference will be introduced through the
4 V2
voltage analog input 2.
Reference will be introduced through the
5 I2
Torque reference1 0 to 12 current analog input 2. NO
The reference will be introduced through
6 MODBUS
Modbus.
The reference will be introduced through
8 COMMS
dr.8 communications.
The common area can be linked with user
9 PLC sequence output and can be used as
command.
Reference will be introduced through the Pulse
12 PULSE
input.
Define the drive control type.
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
A linear V/Hz pattern configures the drive to
increase or decrease the output voltage at a
0 V/Hz fixed rate for different operation frequencies.
G1.9 Ctr.T=V/Hz
This is particularly useful when a constant
torque load is applied.
Slip refers to the variation between frequency
(synchronous speed) and motor rotation
speed. As the load increases, there can be
Control type 0 to 4 2 SlipCom variations between the set frequency and NO
motor rotation speed. Slip compensation is
used for loads that require compensation of
these speed variations.
Sensorless vector control is an operation to
dr.9 carry out vector control without the rotation
speed feedback from the motor but with an
4 S-less1 estimation of the motor rotation speed
calculated by the drive. Sensorless vector
control can generate greater torque at a lower
current level than V/Hz control
G1.10 Torq CTRL=N N
Torque control Not configurable by users. NO
dr.10 Y

26 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable
Name / Set on
display Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
[G1.19] to
G1.11 InchF=10.00Hz
[G1.20]
Inch Frequency Set the motor inch frequency. YES
(dr.19 to
dr.11
dr.20)
G1.12 InchAcT=20.0s INCH acceleration
0.0 to 600.0s Set the time in which the drive accelerates to reach the maximum speed. YES
dr.12 time
G1.13 InchDeT=30.0s INCH deceleration Set the time in which the drive decelerates from the maximum speed until
0.0 to 600.0s YES
dr.13 time stopping.
0.2 kW
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
1.1 kW
G1.14 MTRPWR= (*)
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
3.0 kW
3.7 kW
Motor power Set the motor rated power according to its nameplate. NO
4.0 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
11.0 kW
dr.14
15.0 kW
18.5 kW
22.0 kW
30.0 kW
Proportional to the initial voltage value applied to the motor in the start
moment to overcome the resistive torque in heavy starts.
G1.15 TqBoost=Manual OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Starting voltage manual setting by the use of
Manual parameters FWBoost and RVBoost
0 Manual
Torque boost Auto1 (parameters G1.16 and G1.17, (dr.16 and NO
Auto2 dr.17)).
The drive automatically calculates the voltage
dr.15 1 Auto1 to apply at the start using the motor
parameters.
2 Auto2
G1.16 FWBoost=2.0% Start torque in
0.0 to 15.0% Set the start torque in forward direction. NO
dr.16 forward direction
G1.17 RVBoost=2.0% Start torque in
0.0 to 15.0% Set the start torque in reverse direction. NO
dr.17 reverse direction.
G1.18 MTRFRQ=60.00Hz 30.00 to Set the base frequency (drive output frequency when running at its rated
Motor frequency NO
dr.18 400.00Hz voltage) according to the motor nameplate
Set the start frequency. A start frequency is a frequency at which the drive
G1.19 STRFRQ=0.5Hz
starts voltage output. The drive does not produce output voltage while the
0.01 to
Start frequency frequency reference is lower than the set frequency. However, if a NO
10.00Hz
deceleration stop is made while operating above the start frequency, output
dr.19
voltage will continue until the operation frequency reaches a full-stop (0Hz).

G1.20 MxSpL=60.00Hz Set upper and lower frequency limits. All frequency selections are restricted
40.00 to to frequencies from within the upper and lower limits.
Max speed limit NO
dr.20 400.00 Hz This restriction also applies when you in input a frequency reference using
the keypad.
Change the units used to display the operational speed of the drive by
Hz
G1.21 Hz/Rpm=Hz [1] Hz/Rpm Display setting to 0 (Hz) or 1 (Rpm). This function is only available in he removable YES
Rpm
display.
Select ranges displayed by the drive at power input.

G1.80 SelRngEnt=Run OPT. DESCRIPTION OPT. DESCRIPTION


Freq. 0 Run Freq. 9 Motor RPM
1 Accel. Time 10 DC Voltage
2 Decel. Time 11 User Sel. 1
Select range 0 to 17 3 Cmd Source 12 Out of Order YES
4 Ref. Source 13 Sel. Run Dir.
5 MultiStep 1 14 Oupt. Curr. 2
dr.80 6 MultiStep 2 15 Motor2 RPM
7 MultiStep 3 16 DC Voltage2
8 Oupt. Curr. 17 User Sel. 2

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 27


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
Name / Set on
display Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
Select the monitor code.
G1.81 SelCod=Volt V OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Select monitor Scalar control mode. Drive carries out the
0 to 2 0 Volt V control applying a voltage / frequency ramp to YES
code
the motor.
dr.81 1 Pow kW Control by power.
2 Tq kgf Control by torque.
Displays all parameters that are different from the factory defaults. Use
G1.89 DspChng=All this feature to track changed parameters.
Display changed All
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION YES
parameters Chang
0 All Display all parameters.
dr.89
1 Chang Display changed parameters.
The [ESC] key is a multi-functional key that can be configured to carry out
G1.90 ESC Func= Mov. a number of different functions.
In. Pos.
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
ESC key function 0 to 2 0 Mov. In. Pos. Move to the initial position. NO
1 JOG Key Perform a jog operation.
dr.90
Change from Local to remote control if the key
2 Local/Rem
has previously been configured as such.
Set Eloader function
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
G1.91 Eloader=None [1] Eloader function 0 to 3 0 None No actions are executed. NO
1 Download Download upgrade file.
3 Upload Store drive current values.
Set all parameters back to their factory value.
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
0 No All parameters keep their current value.
No
Initializes all parameter groups (set to
G1.93 INITIALIS=No All 1 All
factory values).
dr
2 dr Initialize parameters from group dr.
bA
3 bA Initialize parameters from group bA.
Ad
4 Ad Initialize parameters from group Ad.
Cn
Parameter 5 Cn Initialize parameters from group Cn.
In NO
initialization 6 In Initialize parameters from group In.
OU
CM 7 OU Initialize parameters from group OU.
AP 8 CM Initialize parameters from group CM.
Pr 9 AP Initialize parameters from group AP.
dr.93
M2 12 Pr Initialize parameters from group Pr.
run 13 M2 Initialize parameters from group M2.
16 run Initialize parameters from group Operation.

Note: Options 2 to 16 are only available in the integrated display.


G1.94 PswRg=0
Register password 0 to 9999 Register password. Reserved for Power Electronics. YES
dr.94
G1.95 PrmLock=0
Lock password 0 to 9999 Password to lock parameter settings. YES
dr.95
G1.97 SoftVer=0
Software version 0 to 9999 Displays the software version. Ex: 0xE6 = v2.30. YES
dr.97
G1.98 IOSwVer=0 IO Software
0 to 65535 Displays the IO software version. YES
dr.98 version
G1.99 IOHwVer=0
Hardware version 0 to 65535 Displays the hardware version. YES
dr.99

28 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

5.3. Group 2 G2: Basic Functions bA


Removable
Name / Set on
display Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
Select the auxiliar speed reference source for the speed sum to the main
reference, according to the following table:

G2.1 REF2 SP=None OPT. OPT. DESCRIPTION


The reference will be introduced by using the
0 None
keypad.
Reference will be introduced through the
Alt Speed Ref 0 to 6 1 V1 NO
voltage analog input 1.
Reference will be introduced through the
3 V2
voltage analog input 2.
bA.1 Reference will be introduced through the
4 I2
current analog input 2.
Reference will be introduced through the Pulse
6 Pulse
input.
Adjust the equation to calculate the speed reference. In order to do this,
the present reference source, the auxiliar reference (bA.1) and the gain
fos this reference (bA.3) are used.

Notice that options 4-7 could result in references with positive or negative
G2.2 AuxCalcType= sign (forward or reverse operation) even when unipolar analog inputs are
M+(G*A) [2] used.

The following table shows the calculation for each option, where:

M: Main speed reference


Aux calculation G: Auxiliary reference gain (G2.3, bA.3)
0 to 7 NO
type A: Auxiliary reference (G2.1, bA.1)

OPT. CALCULATION FUNCTION


0 M+(G*A) . + (. 3 . 1 . 1)
1 Mx(G*A) . (. 3 . 1)
2 M/(G*A) . / (. 3 . 1)
bA.2 [2] 3 M+[M*(G*A)] . + { . (. 3 . 1)}
4 M+G*2(A-50%) . + . 3 2 (. 1 50) . 1
5 Mx[G*2(A-50%) . (. 3 2 (. 1 50))
6 M/[G*2(A-50%)] . /(. 3 2 (. 1 50))
. + . . 3 2
7 M+M*G*2(A-50%)
(. 1 50)
G2.3 AuxRfG=100.0% [2] Auxiliary reference -200.0 to Adjust a gain to the auxiliary reference configured in parameter G2.1
YES
bA.3 [2] gain 200.0% (bA.1).
Set the alternative control mode to command the drive (Start/Stop,
Reset...).
G2.4 CONTROLMODE2=
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
REMOTE
0 LOCAL Drive is controlled from the keypad.
Commands are sent from the control
1 REMOTE
terminals.
Control mode 2 0 to 5 Commands are sent from the control 2 NO
2 REMOTE 2
terminals.
The drive is controlled through the
bA.4 3 MODBUS communications bus, integrated in the
equipment.
The drive control is carried out by the use of
4 COMMS
any of the optional communication boards.

[2] These parameters will only be displayed if G2.1 (bA.1 in integrated display) is not set to 0 (NONE).

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 29


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
Name / Set on
display Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
Select the alternative source for the speed and torque reference
respectively.
G2.5 REF2 SP=LOCAL
Speed reference OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Reference will be given by keypad and will be YES
source 2 0 LOCAL
set in G1.1 (dr.1) - Local Speed.
bA.5 Reference will be introduced through the
2 V1
voltage analog input 1.
0 to 9 Reference will be introduced through the
4 V2
voltage analog input 2.
G2.6 REF2 TQ= LOCAL
Reference will be introduced through the
5 I2
current analog input 2.
Alternative torque The reference will be introduced through
6 MODBUS YES
reference Modbus.
bA.6 The reference will be introduced through
8 COMMS
communications.

Set the alternative acceleration ramp.

G2.7 V/FPn=Linear OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


Output voltage increases and decreases at
constant rate proportional to voltage/frequency
0 Linear
(V/F) relation. Used to achieve a constant
V/F Pattern 0 to 3 torque load regardless the frequency. NO
Output voltage increases quadratically with a
1 Square
proportion of 1.5.
bA.7
2 V/F Us Define a customized V/F pattern.
Output voltage increases quadratically with a
3 Square2
proportion of 2.

Enables the acceleration ramp settings:

G2.8 RmpT= MaxFreq OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


Allows accelerating or decelerating with the
Acceleration ramp MaxFreq 0 MaxFreq same ramp based on the maximum frequency, NO
type DeltaFreq independently from the operating frequency.
Allows defining the accelerating/decelerating
bA.8
1 DeltaFreq time which will reach the next speed reference
when working at constant speed.

Set the time scale for all time-related values. It is particularly useful when a
more accurate Acc/Dec times are required because of load characteristics,
G2.9 TimScl=0.1s or when the maximum time range needs to be extended.
0.01s
Time scale 0.1s OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION NO
1s 0 0.01s Sets 0.01 second as the minimum unit
bA.9 1 0.1s Sets 0.1 second as the minimum unit.
2 1s Sets 1 second as the minimum unit

Set the input frequency. If the frequency changes, so do all related


G2.10 I/P Freq=60Hz settings (base frequency, maximum frequency).
60Hz
Input Frequency OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION NO
50Hz
bA.10 0 60Hz Set drive frequency to 60Hz.
1 50Hz Set drive frequency to 50Hz.

G2.11 POLE Numbr=4 (*)


Pole Number 2 to 48 Set the number of poles in the motor according to its nameplate. NO
bA.11
G2.12 RtSlp=40rpm (*) When a heavy load produces a big slip during the start, configure this
Rated Slip 0 to 3000rpm NO
bA.12 parameter to compensate the motor slip.
G2.13 MTRCUR=3.6A (*)
Motor Current 1.0 to 200.0A Set the motor nominal current in accordance with the nameplate. NO
bA.13

30 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable
Name / Set on
display Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G2.14 NOLODC=1.6A (*) Set the measured current at rated frequency without load. If any difficulties
No load Current 0.5 to 200.0A are found when measuring the current without load, this setting should be NO
bA.14 between 30% and 50% of the motor nameplate rated current.
G2.15 MTR VOLT=0V
Motor Voltage 180 to 480V Set the motor rated voltage according to its nameplate. NO
bA.15
G2.16 EFFICIEN=72% (*)
Efficiency 70 to 100% Set the motor efficiency according to its nameplate. NO
bA.16
Select load inertia based on motor inertia.
G2.17 InertiaRate=0
OPT. FUNCTION
Inertia Rate 0 to 8 0 Less than 10 times motor inertia NO
bA.17 1 10 times motor inertia
2-8 More than 10 times motor inertia

G2.18 TrimPwr%=100% Output power Fine adjustment of the output power calculation, increasing its value if it is
70 to 130% YES
bA.18 adjustment lower than expected or reducing it to match the real value.
Set the input voltage.
G2.19 ACi/Volt=380V Note: The default setting value and this parameter range will vary
170 to 240V
AC Input voltage depending on the drive supply voltage: YES
320 to 480V
bA.19 220V 220
400V 380
Set autotuning type:

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


0 None Auto-tunning is not active
The motor parameters are measured with the
G2.20 AutoTuning=None motor rotating. The stator resistance (Rs), leak
inductance (L), stator inductance (Ls), no-
load current and rotor time constant are all
measured. The encoder state is also
1 All
measured. The encoder related functions
should be rightly set. If load is connected to the
motor axis, the parameter might not be
Auto tuning 0 to 6 correctly measured so remove the load before NO
measurement.
Motor parameters are measured when the
motor is stopped. Stator resistance (Rs), leak
2 Allst
inductance (L) and rotor time constant are
measured at the same time.
The parameter is measured with the motor
bA.20
stopped. The measured values are used for
3 Rs+Lsig
auto torque boost and sensorless vector
control.
Measures the rotor time constant (Tr) with the
6 Tr motor in the stopped position and Control
Mode G1.9 (dr.9) is set to IM Sensorless.

G2.21 Rs=0 (*)


Stator Resistor * Stator resistor fine setting. NO
bA.21 (*)
G2.22 LSigma=0mH (*)
Leak Inductor * Leak inductor fine setting. NO
bA.22 (*)
G2.23 Ls=0mH (*)
Stator Inductor * Inductor stator fine setting. NO
bA.23 (*)
G2.24 Tr=145ms [3]
Rotor Time Const 25 to 5000ms Rotor time constant fine setting. NO
bA.24 [3]
G2.25 Ls Scl=100% [3] Stator inductance
50 to 150% Set stator inductance scale. NO
bA.25 [3] scale.
G2.26 Tr Scl=100% [3] Rotor time
50 to 150% Set rotor time constant scale. NO
bA.26 [3] constant scale.
G2.31 LsR Scl=80% [3] Regeneration
70 to 100% Set regeneration inductance scale. NO
bA.31 [3] inductance scale
G2.41 UsFq1=15.00Hz [4] 0.00 to Set user frequency 1. When the output frequency reaches this value, the
User Frequency 1 NO
bA.41 [4] [G1.20]/dr.20 drive will provide the voltage set in parameter G2.42 User V1 (bA.42).
G2.42 User V1=25% [4] Set user voltage 1. The drive will provide the frequency set in parameter
User Voltage 1 0 to 100% NO
bA.42 [4] when the frequency configured in G2.41 UsFq1 (bA.41) is reached.

* These values depend on the motor setting.


[3] These parameters will only be displayed if G1.9 (dr.19 in integrated display) is set to 4 (S-less1).
[4] These parameters will only be displayed if G2.7 (bA.7 in integrated display) is set to 2 (V/F Us).

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 31


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
Name / Set on
display Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G2.43 UsFq2=30.00Hz [4] 0.00 to Set user frequency 2. When the output frequency reaches this value, the
User Frequency 2 NO
bA.43 [4] [G1.20]/dr.20 drive will provide the voltage set in parameter G2.44 User V2 (bA.44).
G2.44 User V2=50% [4] Set user voltage 2. The drive will provide the frequency set in parameter
User Voltage 2 0 to 100% NO
bA.44 [4] when the frequency configured in G2.43 UsFq2 (bA.43) is reached.
G2.45 UsFq3=45.00Hz [5] 0.00 to Set user frequency 3. When the output frequency reaches this value, the
User Frequency 3 NO
bA.45 [5] [G1.20]/dr.20 drive will provide the voltage set in parameter G2.46 User I2 (bA.46).
G2.46 User I2=75% [5] Set user voltage 3. The drive will provide the frequency set in parameter
User Voltage 3 0 to 100% NO
bA.46 [5] when the frequency configured in G2.45 UsFq3 (bA.45) is reached.
G2.47 UsFrq4=0.00Hz [4] 0.00 to Set user frequency 4. When the output frequency reaches this value, the
User Frequency 4 NO
bA.47 [4] [G1.20]/dr.20 drive will provide the voltage set in parameter G2.48 User V4 (bA.48).
G2.48 User V4=0% [4] Set user voltage 4. The drive will provide the frequency set in parameter
User Voltage 4 0 to 100% NO
bA.48 [4] when the frequency configured in G2.47 UsFq2 (bA.47) is reached.
The user can set multiple speed references for the drive. This will be
G2.50 MREF1=10.00% [5] enabled by the use of the digital inputs configured as speed multi-
Multi-Reference1 references. YES
St1
The speed applied in each situation will depend on the digital inputs that
control the multi-references, which are set as SPEED-L, SPEED-M and
G2.51 MREF2=20.00 % [5]
SPEED-H.
Multi-Reference2 YES
St2 For example, with the following options:

G2.52 MREF3=30.00% [5] - G5.65 (ln.65) DI1 = Speed-H


Multi-Reference3 - 'G5.66 (ln.65) DI2 = Speed-M YES
St3 - 'G5.67 (ln.65) DI3 = Speed -L

G2.53 MREF4=40.00% [5] The adjustment is carried out by assigning a speed value for every
0.00 to parameter within this group, from G2.50 to G2.56 (bA.50 to bA.56).
Multi-Reference4 YES
[G1.20]/dr.20
bA.53 [5]
The following table links the digital inputs configured as SPEED to the
selected multi-reference:
G2.54 MREF5=50.00% [5]
Multi-Reference5 DIGITAL OUTPUT: SPEED YES
PID REFERENCE PARAM.
bA.54 [5] H M L
0 0 X Multi-reference 1 G2.50 (bA.50)
G2.55 MREF6=60.00% [5] 0 X 0 Multi-reference 2 G2.51 (bA.51)
Multi-Reference6 0 X X Multi-reference 3 G2.52 (bA.52) YES
bA.55 [5] X 0 0 Multi-reference 4 G2.53 (bA.53)
X 0 X Multi-reference 5 G2.54 (bA.54)
G2.56 MREF7=60.00% [5] X X 0 Multi-reference 6 G2.55 (bA.55)
Multi-Reference7 X X X Multi-reference 7 G2.56 (bA.56) YES
bA.56 [5]
Note: 0: Inactive and X: Active.

[5] These parameters will only be displayed if one of G5.65-G5.71 (ln.65-ln71 in integrated display) is set to Speed-
L/M/H.

32 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable
Name / Set on
display Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G2.70 ACC2=20.0s Acceleration ramp The user can set different acceleration and deceleration ramps for the drive.
In order to do this, parameters G2.70-82' (bA70-82) must be configured YES
bA.70 2
and the corresponding codes entered in the group Operation.
G2.71 DEC2=30.0s Deceleration ramp
The established setting within the parameter is the time required to reach YES
bA.71 2
the maximum frequency value, starting from 0Hz (or to reduce the
G2.72 ACC3=20.0s Acceleration ramp frequency according to the deceleration times). These ramps will be set
according to the process necessities. YES
bA.72 3
G2.73 DEC3=30.0s [6] Deceleration ramp The setting is carried out by assigning a speed value for each parameter of YES
bA.73 [6] 3 this group:
G2.74 ACC4=20.0s [6] - G2.70 to G2.82 (bA.70 to bA.82): for acceleration times.
Acceleration ramp
- - G2.71 to G2.83 (bA.71 to bA.83): for deceleration times. YES
bA.74 [6] 4
G2.75 DEC4=30.0s [6] Deceleration ramp Once multi function terminals have been configured (G5.65-71, In.65-71)
as Speed-L/M/H (options 11, 12 and 49), acceleration and deceleration YES
bA.75 [6] 4
commands will control the drive operation based on the setting of G2.70-
G2.76 ACC5=20.0s [6] Acceleration ramp 83 (bA.70-83).
YES
bA.76 [6] 5
For example, with the following options:
G2.77 DEC5=30.0s [6] Deceleration ramp
YES
bA.77 [6] 5 - G5.65 (ln.65) DI1 = Speed-L
G2.78 ACC6=20.0s [6] - 'G5.66 (ln.65) DI2 = Speed-M
Acceleration ramp 0.0 to 600.0s
YES
bA.78 [6] 6
The drive will operate as shown in the figure:
G2.79 DEC6=30.0s [6] Deceleration ramp
YES
bA.79 [6] 6
G2.80 ACC7=20.0s [6] Acceleration ramp
YES
bA.80 [6] 7
G2.81 DEC7=30.0s [6] Deceleration ramp
YES
bA.81 [6] 7
G2.82 ACC8=20.0s [6] Acceleration ramp
YES
bA.82 [6] 8
G2.83 DEC8=30.0s [6]

Accel / decel
DI1 DI2
Deceleration ramp time
YES
bA.83 [6] 8 0
1
2
3

[6] These parameters will only be displayed if one of G5.65-G5.71 (ln.65-ln71 in integrated display) is set to Xcel-L/M/H.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 33


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

5.4. Group 3 G3: Expanded Functions Ad


Removable
Name / Set on
display Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G3.1 AccPn=Linear Set the type of acceleration and deceleration depending on the application:
Acceleration OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
pattern The output frequency is constant and
Ad.1 0 Linear
Linear increases/ decreases linearly.
NO
S-curve Used in applications which require a soft
G3.2 DecPn=Linear
Deceleration acceleration/ deceleration, such as lifting
1 S-curve
pattern loads. The S curve index can be set from
Ad.2 parameters G3.3 G3.6 (Ad.3-Ad.6).
G3.3 AccSSrt=40% [7] Set the curve whenever the acceleration/deceleration pattern is defined as
S curve start
1 to 100% S curve. It is used to set the S curve curvilinear relation when starting the NO
Ad.3 [7] acceleration slope
acceleration.
G3.4 AccSEnd=40% [7] Set the curves ramp once the acceleration/deceleration pattern has been
S curve stop
1 to 100% defined as S Curve. It is used to set the S Curve curvilinear relation when NO
Ad.4 [7] acceleration slope
ending the acceleration.
G3.5 DecSSrt=40% [8] Set the curve whenever the acceleration/deceleration pattern is defined as
S curve start
1 to 100% S curve. It is used to set the S curve curvilinear relation when starting the NO
Ad.5 [8] deceleration slope
deceleration.
G3.6 DecSEnd=40% [8] Set the curves ramp once the acceleration/deceleration pattern has been
S curve stop
1 to 100% defined as S Curve. It is used to set the S Curve curvilinear relation when NO
Ad.6 [8] deceleration slope
ending the deceleration.
Define the motor start mode.
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
G3.7 START=RAMP The drive will start applying a frequency ramp
0 RAMP
to the motor.
Allows accelerating after having stopped the
RAMP motor by the use of the DC Brake. It can also
Motor start mode NO
DCSTART be used after a normal brake whenever some
torque is needed after opening the external
1 DCSTART
Ad.7 brake.
To configure this option, see parameters
G3.12 DCSt T and G3.13 DC Curr (Ad.12
and Ad.13).
Select the drive main stop mode. This value should be adequate for each
application.
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
G3.8 STOP=RAMP The drive will stop applying a frequency ramp
0 RAMP
to stop the motor.
The drive will apply DC to stop the motor. To
configure this option, see parameters from
1 DC BRAKE
G3.14 PreDC T (Ad.14) to G3.17 DCBk F
(Ad.17).
Stop mode 0 to 4 The drive will cut the motor output supply, NO
2 SPIN
stopping due to inertia.
The drive will stop the motor as soon as
possible by controlling the regenerative energy
Ad.8 to avoid an overvoltage fault. This option may
increase or decrease the deceleration time
4 POW BRKE
according to the inertia of the load.
Note: Do not use this option in applications
where decelerations are frequent. It may
cause overheating.
Invert motor speed. This function helps to prevent the motor from rotating
G3.9 FWR/RV=None in inverse direction.
None OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Allow speed
FWDPrev 0 None The motor can spin in both directions. NO
invertion
REVPrev
Ad.9 1 FWDPrev Motor cannot rotate clockwise.
2 RevPrev Motor cannot rotate anti clockwise.
This parameter allows operating the drive if once powered up the start
G3.10 Run Aft VlF=N command is already present.
NO OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Power-on Run The drive will NOT operate if the start command is YES
YES
0 NO present on power up. To operate, a stop command
Ad.10 should previously be sent.
1 YES The drive starts after powering up.

[7] These parameters will only be displayed if G3.1 (Ad.1 in integrated display) is set to1 (S-curve).
[8] These parameters will only be displayed if G3.2 (Ad.2) is set to 1 (S-curve).

34 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable
Name / Set on
display Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G3.12 DCSt T=0.00s [9] Set the time during which the equipment applies DC voltage before starting
Time to DC start 0.00 to 60.00s to accelerate when the equipment is set in DC start mode. To enable the NO
Ad.12 [9] DC start, parameter G3.7 (Ad.7) must be set to DCSTART.
G3.13 DC Curr=50% Set the start current level when the equipment is set in DC START mode.
Current injection
0 to 200% To enable DC start option, parameter G3.7 (Ad.7) must be set to NO
Ad.13 DC start
DCSTART.
G3.14 PreDCT=0.10s [10] Set the time before starting the DC Brake. Once the frequency is below the
Pre DC brake time 0.00 to 60.00s value adjusted in parameter G3.17 DCBkF (Ad.17) the drive will wait this NO
Ad.14 [10] time before starting the DC Brake operation.
G3.15 DCBrkT=1.00s [10]
DC brake time 0.00 to 60.00s Set the DC Brake operation time. NO
Ad.15 [10]
G3.16 DCBkCur=50% [10]
Current level DC Set the current level which will be applied to the motor in percentage of the
0 to 200% motor rated current during DC Brake operation. NO
Ad.16 [10] brake
G3.17 DCBkF=5.00Hz [10] Frequency start Set the frequency value at which the drive will enable the DC brake. The
[G1.19]/dr.19
DC Brake operation will start once the frequency is below this value and the NO
Ad.17 [10] DC brake to 60.00
time set in parameter G3.14 PreDCT (Ad.14) has elapsed.
G3.20 AcDF=5.00Hz [10] [G1.19] to During the acceleration process, the drive will pause at this frequency,
Acceleration dwell [G1.20] keeping it constant during the time set in parameter G3.21 AccDWT NO
Ad.20 [10] frequency (dr.19 to dr.20) (Ad.21).
G3.21 AccDWT=0.0s During the acceleration process, this parameter allows to define during how
Acceleration dwell
0.0 to 60.0s long the drive will operate at the constant frequency set in parameter G3.20 NO
Ad.21 time
AccDF (Ad.20).
G3.22 DeDF=5.00Hz [G1.19] to
[G1.20] During the deceleration process, the drive will pause at this frequency
Deceleration dwell
value, remaining constant during the time period established in parameter NO
Ad.22 frequency (dr.19 to
G3.23 DecDWT (Ad.23).
dr.20)
G3.23 DecDWT=0.0s During the deceleration process, this parameter allows to set how long will
Deceleration dwell
0.0 to 60.0s the drive be operating at the constant frequency set in parameter G3.22 NO
Ad.23 time
DecDF (Ad.22).
Enable or disable the frequency limit.
G3.24 UseFrqLimit=N
Use frequency NO OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION NO
limit YES 0 NO Frequency limit disabled.
Ad.24
1 YES Frequency limit enabled.
G3.25 FLtLo=0.50Hz [11] Frequency lower 0.00 to
Set the lower frequency limit if parameter G3. 24 (Ad. 24) is set as YES. YES
Ad.25 [11] limit [G3.26]/Ad.26
G3.26 FLtHi=[G1.20]/dr.20
Hz [11] [G3.25] to
Frequency higher Set the upper frequency limit whenever parameter G3. 24 (Ad. 24) is set
[G1.20] NO
limit (Ad.25/dr.20) as YES.
Ad.26 [11]

The user can enable or disable a band of jump frequencies to avoid


G3.27 Jump Freq=N resonance frequencies or other frequency types that the motor will avoid as
references. The drive will pass these frequencies during the speed changes
Jump frequency NO (acceleration and/or deceleration) but will not operate within these values. NO
activation YES OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Ad.27 0 NO Disable the frequency jump function.
1 YES Enable the frequency jump function.
G3.28 JmpL1=10.00Hz [12] Lower limit jump 0.00 to
Set the frequency jump 1 lower limit. YES
Ad.28 [12] frequency 1 [G3.29]/Ad.29
G3.29 JmpH1=15.00Hz [12] Upper limit jump [G3.28] to
[G1.20] Set the frequency jump 1 upper limit. YES
Ad.29 [12] frequency 1 (Ad.28 to dr.20)
G3.30 JmpL2=20.00Hz [12] Lower limit jump 0.00 to
Set the frequency jump 2 lower limit. YES
Ad.30 [12] frequency 2 [G3.31]/Ad.31
G3.31 JmpH2=25.00Hz [12] Upper limit jump [G3.30] to
[G1.20] Set the frequency jump 2 upper limit. YES
Ad.31 [12] frequency 2 (Ad.30 to dr.20)
G3.32 JmpL3=30.00Hz [12] Lower limit jump 0.00 to
Set the frequency jump 3 lower limit. YES
Ad.32 [12] frequency 3 [G3.33]/Ad.33
G3.33 JmpH3=35.00Hz [12] Upper limit jump [G3.32] to
Set the frequency jump 3 upper limit. YES
Ad.33 [12] frequency 3 [G1.20]/dr.20
G3.41 RlsCur=50.0% [13] Open brake Set the output current at which the drive will open the relay configured as
0.0 to 180.0% NO
Ad.41 [13] current BRCtrl. See parameter G6.31 (OU.1).

[9] This parameter will only be displayed if G3.7 (Ad.7) is set to 1 (DCSTART).
[10] These parameters will only be displayed if G3.8 (Ad.8) is set to 1 (DCBRAKE).
[11] These parameters will only be displayed if G3.24 (Ad.24) is set to 1 (YES).
[12] These parameters will only be displayed if G3.27 (Ad.27) is set to 1 (YES).
[13] These parameters will only be displayed if either G6.31 or G6.33 (OU.31, OU.33 for integrated display) is set to
BRCtrl.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 35


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
Name / Set on
display Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
Once the motor current is greater than the one set in parameter G3.41
G3.42 RlsDly=1.00s [13] RlsCurr (Ad.41) and the frequency reached in the motor is the same as the
Delay before brake
0.00 to 10.00s one set in parameter G3.44 FwdFrq (Ad.44), the drive will open the relay NO
opening
Ad.42 [13] configured as BRCtrl and will keep this speed during the time established
in this parameter.
G3.44 FwdFq=1.00Hz [13] Brake opening 0.00 to Set the brake opening frequency of the relay configured as BRCtrl while
NO
Ad.44 [13] forward frequency [G1.20]/dr.20 the motor is accelerating in positive direction.
G3.45 RevFq=1.00Hz [13] Brake opening 0.00 to Set the brake opening frequency of the relay configured as BRCtrl while
NO
Ad.45 [13] reverse frequency [G1.20]/dr.20 the motor is accelerating in negative direction.
G3.46 BEngDly=1.00s [13] Once the motor has reached the frequency set in G3.47 BEngFr (Ad.47),
Delay before brake
0.00 to 10.00s the drive will close the braking relay and will keep this speed during the time NO
Ad.46 [13] closing
established in this parameter.
G3.47 BEngF=2.00Hz [13] Brake closing 0.00 to Set the frequency value at which the braking relay will stop operating,
NO
Ad.47 [13] frequncy [G1.20]/dr.20 allowing the closed brake function.
Set the minimum flux that the motor can employ to operate under low load
conditions. With this optimized flux system, noises and power losses will be
reduced due to the automatic flux level arrangement. The following table
shows the different available configurations:
G3.50 FLX MIN=NONE
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
0 NONE No action is executed
Minimum flux Selects the manual mode. If the output current
0 to 2 is lower than the parameter G2.14 NOLODC NO
mode
1 MANU (bA.14) (no load motor current), output voltage
will be reduced in the magnitude set in
parameter G3.51 FluxLVEL (Ad.51)
Ad.50 Selects the automatic mode. The output
voltage is set taking into account the motor
2 AUTO
rated current set in G2.13 MTRCUR and
G2.14 NOLODC (bA.13 and bA.14).
G3.51 FluxLVEL=0% [14] Minimum flux level Set the output voltage reducing magnitude if parameter G3.50 (Ad.50) is
0 to 30% YES
Ad.51 [14] in manual mode set to MANU.
Set the frequency at which the drive will change the acceleration ramps,
from the standard to those configured in G2.70 (bA.70) and G2.71
(bA.71).
G3.60 XclCF=0.00Hz

Acceleration dwell 0.00 to


NO
frequency [G1.20]/dr.20

Ad.60

Choose the fan operating mode.

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


G3.64 FAN=During Run
The drive fans will connect with the start
0 DuringRun command and disconnect three minutes after
Fan operating the drive stops.
0 to 2 YES
mode The fans are permanently working whenever
1 Always ON
the drive is powered.
Ad.64 The fan will connect when the temperature in
2 Temp Ctrl the heat sink reaches the preset control
temperature.
Automatically save the speed reference defined by the motorized
G3.65 SaveMot Frq=N potentiometer.
Save motorized
NO
potentiometer OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION YES
YES
frequency 0 NO Speed reference is not saved.
Ad.65
1 YES The speed reference is saved in the memory.

[14] These parameters will only be displayed if G3.50 (Ad.50 in integrated display) is different than NONE.

36 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable
Name / Set on
display Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
The comparator source can be set according to the following table:

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


G3.66 SLCOM=None 0 None There is no source for the comparator
Voltage analog input 1 will be used as source
1 V1
Select comparator by the comparator.
0 to 6 NO
source Voltage analog input 2 will be used as source
2 V2
by the comparator.
Current analog input 2 will be used as source
Ad.66 3 I2
by the comparator.
Pulse input will be used as source by the
6 Pulse
3
comparator.
Define the level to compare with the source selected in parameter G3.66
G3.67 ScON=90.00% Output activation
[G3.68] to SLCOM (Ad.66). In case this level is over passed, one of the digital outputs
level comparator NO
100.00 adjusted as COMPARAT in G6 Outputs will enable. See parameters
Ad.67 mode
G6.31 and G6.32 (OU.31 a OU.33).
Define the level to compare with the source selected in parameter G3.66
G3.68 SC OF=10.00% Output
-100.00 to SLCOM. In case this level is over passed, one of the digital outputs
deactivation level NO
[G3.67] adjusted as COMPARAT in [G6 Outputs] will disable it. See parameters
Ad.68 comparator mode
G6.31 and G6.32 (OU.31 a OU.33).
G3.70 RunEMod=Always Configure safe operation mode. With it, the drive operates if it has
Enable permissions to do so.
Always OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Safe operation
Enable The drive respondos to any start command NO
selection 0 Always Enable
Ad.70 DI Dependent without requiring further permisisons.
The drive will only operate if the digital input
1 DI Dependent
configured as 13 RUNEnable is active.
Set the operation of the drive when the multi-function input terminal in safe
operation mode is off.
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Blocks the drive output when the multifunction
0 Free-Run
terminal is off.
If the digital input configured as 13
RUNEnable is disabled when the drive is
G3.71 RunDStp=Free operating, the drive decelerates according to
Run [15] 1 Q-Stop
the ramp defined in parameter Ad.72. To
establish again the start command, the input
has to be enabled while the drive is stopped.
If the digital input configured as 13
RUNEnable is disabled when the drive is
operating, the drive decelerates according to
2 Q-Stop Res the ramp defined in parameter Ad.72. If once
Free-Run the permission digital input is reset the start
Safe operation
Q-Stop command is present, the drive will start NO
stop
Q-Stop Res normally.

The figure below illustrates the safe stop operation mode depending on
the chosen option:

Ad.71 [15]

G3.72 QStpT=5.0s [15] Set the deceleration time when G3.71 (Ad.71 in the integrated display) is
Q-Stop Time 0.0 to 600.0s YES
Ad.72 [15] set to 1 (Q-Stop) or 2 (Q-Stop Res).
Enable regeneration prevention. When this situation occurs, the drive will
G3.74 RegAvdSel=N Enable
N increase the output frequency to prevent a fault due to overvoltage in the
regeneration NO
Y DC link. With this parameter, the drive helps the dynamic brake unit to avoid
Ad.74 prevention
regeneration situations when the drive operates at normal speed.

[15] These parameters will only be displayed if G3.70 (Ad.70) is set to 1(DI DEPENDENT).

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 37


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
Name / Set on
display Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
Set the voltage level in the DC link voltage at which the algorithm will start
increasing the speed.

G3.75 VlRegL=350V /
NO
700V

Regeneration
300 to 800V
prevention level

Ad.75 NO
Note: The default value and parameter range will vary depending on the
drive supply voltage:
220V300 to 400V
380V600 to 800V
G3.76 CpFrL=1.00Hz 16 Set the alternative frequency width to be used by the algorithm when the
Compare 0.00 to
voltage level set in parameter G3.76 (Ad.75) is overcome during NO
Ad.76 [16] frequency limit 10.00Hz
regeneration prevention.
G3.77 RegAvP=50.0% [16] P gain To prevent regeneration zone, set P gain/I gain in the DC link voltage
regeneration 0.0 to 100.0% suppress PI controller. YES
Ad.77 [16] prevention
Note: Press regeneration prevention does not operate during accelerations
G3.78 RgAvI=50.0ms [16] I gain regeneration 0.0 to or decelerations; it only operates during constant speed motor operation.
When regeneration prevention is activated, output frequency may change YES
Ad.78 [16] prevention 3000.0ms
within the range set at G3.76(Ad.76).

Fire mode forces the drive to ignore all minor faults and resets and restarts
with major faults without considering the number of retry attempts. This
action is performed until equipment destruction if necessary.
G3.80 FireModSel=None
[17]
The drive runs in Fire mode when this parameter is set to 1 (Fire Mode),
and the multifunction terminal G5.65-71 (In. 65-71) configured for Fire
mode is turned on.
Fire mode OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
0 to 2 NO
selection
0 None Fire mode is off
Fire mode enabled. When the digital input
configured as Fire Mode, the drive will start
1 Fire Mode working in this mode, at the frequency
Ad.80 [17]
configured in G3.81 (Ad.81) and the direction
set in G3.82 (Ad.82).
The drive simulates fire mode operation for a
2 Fire Mode Test
while. Then, it stops.

G3.81 FMdFr=60.00Hz [17] Fire mode Set the frequency for drive operation in Fire mode. The Fire mode frequency
0.00 to
takes priority over the Jog frequency, Multi-step frequencies, and frequency NO
Ad.81 [17] frequency 60.00Hz
configured from keyboard.
G3.82 FModD=Forward Set Fire mode direction according to the following table:
[17]
Fire mode Forward OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
NO
direction Reverse 0 Forward Forward direction.
Ad.82 [17]
1 Reverse Reverse direction.

[16] Displayed when G3.74 (Ad.74) is set to YES.


[17] Displayed when G3.80(Ad.80) is set to YES.

38 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

5.5. Group 4 G4: Control Functions Cn


Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
Adjust motor operational noise by varying the commutation frequency in the
motor output stage
G4.4 FREQ=2.0 / 3.0kHz
If the frequency is set high, it reduces operational noise from the motor, and
Modulation if it is set low, the operational noise from the motor increases.
- YES
frequency
Default value and range for this parameter depend on the load rate:
Cn.4
Normal load: 2kHz (Max 5kHz).
Heavy load: 3kHz (Max 15kHz).
Change the modulation to reduce the heat loss and leakage current from
the drive.
G4.5 PWM=Normal PWM
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Modulationmode 0 to 1 0 Normal PWM No changes to load rate. NO
Reduces heat loss and leakage current
Cn.5 LowLeakage
1 compared to Normal PWM, but the motor
PWM
noise increases.
G4.9 PreExT=1.00s Set the initial excitation time. Pre-excitation is used to start the operation
Pre-excitation time 0.00 to 60.00s NO
Cn.9 after performing excitation up to the motors rated flux.

Adjust the flux supplied during the pre-excitation time set in G4.9 (Cn.9).
The motor flux increases up to the rated flux with the time constant as
shown in the following figure.
10 PreExF=100.0%

100.0 to
Pre-excitation flux NO
500.0%

Cn.10

To reduce the time taken to reach the rated flux, a higher motor flux base
value than the rated flux must be provided. When the magnetic flux reaches
the rated flux, the provided motor flux base value is reduced.
After the motor stops, this parameter sets the time during which direct
current from the drive is fed into the motor.
G4.11 PwofDl=0.00s

Power off delay 0.00 to 60.00s NO

Cn.11

Allows configuring the sensorless control gain.


G4.20 SL2GaViSel=N
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Sensorless control YES Sensorless control gain configuration
0 YES YES
gain 2 NO parameters will not be shown.
Enables sensorless control gain configuration.
Cn.20
1 NO Parameters G4.21-32 (Cn.21-32) will be
displayed.
G4.21 ASR P1=500% (*) Set the proportional gain 1 of the speed controller (ASR). The higher the
ASR proportional
0 to 5000% proportional gain, the faster the response will be. But if the gain is too high, YES
Cn.21 gain 1
the speed of the motor might oscillate.
G4.22 ASR I1=300ms (*) ASR integral time
10 to 9999ms Set the integral gain 1 of the speed controller (ASR). YES
Cn.22 1

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 39


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G4.23 ASR P2=120.0% [18] Independent Set the proportional gain 2 of a separate controller. The higher the
(*) 1.0 to
controller proportional gain, the faster the response will be. But if the gain is too high, YES
1000.0%
Cn.23 [18] proportional gain 2 the speed of the motor might oscillate.
G4.24 ASR I2=30.0% [18] Independent
(*) 1.0 to
controller integral Set the integral gain 2 of a separate controller. YES
1000.0%
Cn.24 [18] gain 2
G4.25 ASR I1=300ms [18] Integral time
(*) sensorless 10 to 999ms Sensorless speed controller integral gain 0. YES
Cn.25 [18] controller
G4.26 P Flux=50% [18] (*) Flux estimator
1 to 200% YES
Cn.26 [18] proportional gain
Sensorless vector control requires the rotor flux estimator. Use these
G4.27 I Flux=50% [18] (*) parameters to adjust flux estimator gain.
Flux estimator
1 to 200% YES
Cn.27 [18] integral gain
G4.28 SpEsP1=100 [18] (*) Speed estimator
0 to 32767 Adjusts speed estimator gain for sensorless vector control: YES
Cn.28 [18] proportional gain 1
G4.29 SpEsI1=500 [18] (*) Speed estimator At low speed (10Hz or lower), increase the value of G4.29 (Cn.29)
100 to 1000 by increments of 5. YES
Cn.29 [18] integral gain 1
At mid speed (30 Hz or higher), increase the value of G4.28 (Cn.28)
G4.30 SpEsI2=2000 [18] (*) Speed estimator by increments of 500. If the parameter setting is too extreme, over
100 to 10000 current trip may occur at low speed. YES
Cn.30 [18] integral gain 2
G4.31 ACR P2=500 [18] (*) Sensorless cont.
10 to 1000 Adjusts the P and I gains of the sensorless current controller. YES
Cn.31 [18] proportional gain
G4.32 ACR I2=500 [18] (*) Sensorless cont. If the value of G4.10 (Cn.10) is high, an overcurrent trip at start can occur.
10 to 1000 In this case, reduce the value of G4.31 (Cn.31) by decrements of 10. YES
Cn.32 [18] integral gain
G4.48 ACR P1=1200
Controller P gain 10 to 10000 Adjust current controller P gain. YES
Cn.48
G4.49 ACR I1=120
Controller I gain 10 to 10000 Adjust current controller I gain YES
Cn.49
G4.52 OuFVec=0ms
Output filter vector 0 to 2000ms Set the torque controller output filter NO
Cn.52
Select the source to introduce the torque limit reference.
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Reference will be given by keypad and will be
0 LOCAL
set in G1.1 (dr.1) - Local Speed.
G4.53 TqLimRef=LOCAL Reference will be introduced through the
2 V1
voltage analog input 1.
Reference will be introduced through the
4 V2
voltage analog input 2.
Torque limit Reference will be introduced through the
0 to 12 5 I2 NO
reference current analog input 2.
The reference will be introduced through
6 MODBUS
Modbus.
The reference will be introduced through the
8 COMMS
communications.
Cn.53 The common area can be linked with user
9 PLC sequence output and can be used as
command.
Reference will be introduced through the Pulse
12 PULSE
input.
G4.54 TLpsFW=180.0%
[19] Forward positive The user can set the forward motoring operation torque limit whenever the
0.0 to 200.0% YES
torque limit torque limit reference has been set as LOCAL
Cn.54 [19]

* These values depend on the motor setting.


[18] Displayed when G1.9 (dr.9 in integrated display) is set to 4 (IM Sensorless) and G4.20 (Cn.20) is set to 1 (YES)
[19] Displayed when G1.9 (dr.19) is set to 4 (IM Sensorless). This will change the initial value of G3.74 (Ad.74), Torque
limit, to 150%.

40 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G4.55 TLngFW=180.0%
[19] Forward negative The user can set the forward regeneration operation torque limit whenever
0.0 to 200.0% YES
torque limit the torque limit reference has been set as LOCAL
Cn.55 [19]
G4.56 TLpsRV=180.0% [19] Reverse positive The user can set the reverse motoring operation torque limit whenever the
0.0 to 200.0% YES
Cn.56 [19] torque limit torque limit reference has been set as LOCAL
G4.57 TLngRV=180.0%
[19] Reverse negative The user can set the reverse regeneration operation torque limit whenever
0.0 to 200.0% YES
torque limit the torque limit reference has been set as LOCAL
Cn.57 [19]

Select the source to introduce the speed limit reference.


OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Reference will be given by keypad and will be
0 LOCAL
G4.62 SpLiRf=LOCAL [19] set in G1.1 (dr.1) - Local Speed.
Reference will be introduced through the
2 V1
voltage analog input 1.
Reference will be introduced through the
4 V2
Speed limit voltage analog input 2.
0 to 8 Reference will be introduced through the NO
reference 5 I2
current analog input 2.
The reference will be introduced through
6 MODBUS
Modbus.
Cn.62 [19] The reference will be introduced through the
7 COMMS
communications.
The common area can be linked with user
8 PLC sequence output and can be used as
command.

G4.63 SpL(+)=60.00Hz [19] Forward speed 0.00 to The user can set the forward speed limit whenever the speed limit reference
YES
Cn.63 [19] limit 400.00Hz has been set as LOCAL.
G4.64 SpL(-)=60.00Hz [19] Reverse speed 0.00 to The user can set the reverse speed limit whenever the speed limit reference
YES
Cn.64 [19] limit 400.00Hz has been set as LOCAL.
G4.65 SpLGa=500% [19] Set how much the speed reference has to decrease when motor speed
Speed limit gain 100 to 5000% YES
Cn.65 [19] exceeds the speed limit.
Select a speed search mode.

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


Speed search is carried out as it controls the
drive output current during idling below the
G4.72 (Cn.72) parameter setting. If the
G4.70 SSMode=Flying direction of the idling motor and the direction
Start1 of operation command at restart are the same,
a stable speed search function can be
0 Flying Start1
performed at about 10 Hz or lower. However,
if the direction of the idling motor and of
operation command at restart are different, the
speed search does not produce a satisfactory
result because the direction of idling cannot be
Speed search Flying Start1 established.
NO
mode selection Flying Start2 The speed search is carried out as it controls
the ripple current which is generated by the
counter electromotive force during no-load
rotation. This mode establishes the direction of
the idling motor (forward/reverse), thus the
speed search function is stable regardless the
direction of the idling motor and of operation
Cn.70 1 Flying Start2
command. However, since ripple current is
used, the idle frequency is not accurately
determined and re-acceleration may start from
zero speed when the speed search is
performed for the idling motor at low speed
(about 10 - 15 Hz, though it depends on motor
characteristics).

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 41


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
Set the search mode. Adjust each bit to 0 or 1 according to the table below:

G4.71 Srch Mod=0000 OPT DESCRIPTION


0001 Selection of speed search on acceleration.
Search mode 00 to 15 0010 Speed seach on start after fault. NO
0100 Speed search after a power supply fault.
Cn.71 Speed search when the drive is energized, if the start
1000
command is present.

G4.72 Srch I=150% [20] Speed search Allows controlling the current during the speed search in percentage in
80 to 200% YES
Cn.72 [20] mode current relation with the motor rated current.

G4.73 Kp Srch [21] G4.73 Search Proporc (Cn.73) allows setting the proportional gain for the
Speed search speed search. G4.74 Search integral (Cn.74) sets the integral gain for the
0 to 9999 YES
mode prop. gain speed search.
Cn.73 [21]

G4.74 Ki Srch [21] Note: Default value of these parameters depends on G4.70 (Cn.70):
Speed search
0 to 9999 Flying Start1100 YES
mode integral gain
Cn.74 [21] Flying Start2600
G4.75 SrchDly=1.0s [21] Speed search Allows locking the output during an established time before proceeding with
0.0 to 60.0s NO
Cn.75 [21] delay the speed search.
G4.76 SpEsGa=100% [21] Speed estimator
50 to 150% Speed search estimator gain. YES
Cn.76 [21] gain
When the input power supply is disconnected, the drive DC link voltage
decreases and a low voltage trip occurs blocking the output. A kinetic
energy buffering operation uses regenerative energy generated by the
motor during the blackout to maintain the DC link voltage. This extends the
time for a low voltage trip to occur after a sudden power interruption.

G4.77 KEB Sel=No This parameter allows selecting the kinetic energy buffering operation. If 1
or 2 is selected, it controls the drive output frequency and charges the DC
link (drive DC part) with energy generated from the motor.

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


General deceleration is carried out until a low
0 No
voltage trip occurs.
KEB Select 0 to 2 When the input power is lost, it charges the DC NO
link with regenerated energy. When the input
power is restored, so does normal operation
1 KEB1 from energy buffering operation to the
frequency reference operation. Operation
frequency acceleration is set in G4.89
(Cn.89).
Cn.77 When the input power is lost, it charges the DC
link with regenerated energy. When the input
power is restored, it changes from the energy
2 KEB2
buffering operation to the deceleration stop
operation. The operation frequency
deceleration time is set in G1.4 (dr.4).

G4.78 KEBStr=125.0% [22] Initial value for 110.0 to


NO
Cn.78 [22] KEB operation 140.0% Sets the start and stop points of the kinetic energy buffering operation. The
set values must be based on the low voltage trip level as 100% and the stop
G4.79 KEBStp=130.0% [22] Value to stop KEB [G4.78] to level G4.79 (Cn.79) must be higher than the start level G4.78 (Cn.78).
NO
Cn.79 [22] operation 140.0
G4.80 KEBPGn=10000 [22] Maintain the voltage of the DC power section during the kinetic energy
KEB proportional
1 to 20000 buffering operation. Change the setting value when a low voltage trip occurs YES
Cn.80 [22] gain
right after a power failure.
G4.81 KEBIGn=500 [22] Maintain the voltage of the DC power section during the kinetic energy
KEB integral gain 1 to 20000 buffering operation. Sets the gain value to maintain the frequency during YES
Cn.81 [22]
the kinetic energy buffering operation until the drive stops.

* These values depend on the motor setting.


[20] Displayed when G4.70 (Cn.70) is set to 0 (YES).
[21] Displayed when any of the G4.71 (Cn.71) bits are set to 1.
[22] Displayed when G4.77 (Cn.77) is not set to 0 (NO).

42 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G4.85 FlxPrGa1=370 [23] Flux proportional
100 to 700 Flux estimator proportional gain 1. YES
Cn.85 [23] gain 1
G4.86 FlxPrGa2=0 [23] Flux proportional
0 to 100 Flux estimator proportional gain 2. YES
Cn.86 [23] gain 2
G4.87 FlxPrGa3=100 [23] Flux proportional
0 to 500 Flux estimator proportional gain 3. YES
Cn.87 [23] gain 3
G4.88 FlxInGa1=50 [23]
Flux integral gain 1 0 to 200 Flux estimator integral gain 1. YES
Cn.88 [23]
G4.89 FlxInGa2=50 [23]
Flux integral gain 2 0 to 200 Flux estimator integral gain 2. YES
Cn.89 [23]
G4.90 FlxInGa3=50 [23]
Flux integral gain 3 0 to 200 Flux estimator integral gain 3. YES
Cn.90 [23]
G4.91 SLVoCmp1=20 (*)
[23] SL voltage
0 to 60 Adjust output voltage compensation values for sensorless vector control. YES
compensation 1
Cn.91 [23]
If the output frequency is higher than the base frequency during no-load
G4.92 SLVoCmp2=20 (*) SL voltage operation at low speed, decrease the value of G4.91 (Cn.91) by
[23] compensation 2 0 to 60 decrements of 5 (10Hz or lower). YES
Cn.92 [23] If the torque is insufficient, increase G4.93 (Cn.93) by increments of 5.
If the motor hunts or overcurrent trip occurs in regenerative load at low
G4.93 SLVoCmp3=20 (*) SL voltage speed (10 Hz or lower), increase the value of G4.92-93 (Cn.92-93) by
[23] compensation 3 0 to 60 increments of 5 at the same time. YES
Cn.93 [23]
G4.94 FWFrS=100.0% [23] If an over current trip occurs due to sudden load fluctuation at high speed
SL fluctuation 80.0 to
(50 Hz or higher), increase/decrease the value of G4.94 Cn.94 by YES
Cn.94 [23] frequency 110.0%
increments/decrements of 5% (set below 100%).
G4.95 FcFrS=2.00Hz [23] SL switching 0.00 to
Set sensorless gain switching frequency. YES
Cn.95 [23] frequency 8.00Hz

5.6. Group 5 G5: Inputs In


Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G5.1 MxFA=[G1.20] Analog input max. [G1.19] to
Set drive operating frequency for the maximum voltage input of the analog
[G1.20] YES
In.1 freq (dr.19 to dr.20) input.
G5.2 MaxTrq=100.0% Analog input max.
0.0 to 200.0% Reserved. YES
In.2 torque
G5.5 AnlgIN1=0.00V
V1 Monitor 0.00 to 12.00 Voltage analog input 1 (V1) visualization.
In.5
This parameter allows setting the operation directions of the drive.
G5.6 An1PT=0-10V
0-10V
V1 polarity OPTION FUNCTION NO
-/+10V
0-10V Unipolar (forward operation)
In.6
10V Bipolar (forward and reverse operation directions)
G5.7 Ain1LP=10ms Low Pass Filter for V1. Allows setting the time response to a change
V1 filter 0 to 10000ms produced in the speed reference, to reduce the speed fluctuation due to YES
In.7 unstable signs or noise. Thus, the response becomes slower.
G5.8 A1MnV=0.00V V1 minimum 0.00 to Define the minimum voltage for the analog input 1 according to the
YES
In.8 voltage 10.00V connected sensor characteristics

G5.9 A1MnR=0.00% Set the speed reference corresponding to the analog input 1 minimum
V1 minimum 0.00 to negative range. Is corresponds to the minimum voltage level set in G5.12
YES
reference 100.00% A1NMn (In.12). It is configured to introduce the speed reference through
In.9 the AI. The value is a percentage of the frequency set in G5.1 MxFA (In.1).

[23] Displayed when G4.20 (Cn.20) is set to 1 (YES).

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 43


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G5.10 An1MxV=10.00V V1 maximum 0.00 to Define the maximum voltage for the analog input 1, according to the
YES
In.10 voltage 10.00V connected sensor characteristics.

G5.11 A1MxR=100.00% Set the speed reference corresponding to the analog input 1 minimum
V1 maximum 0.00 to range. It corresponds to the minimum voltage level set in G5.10 An1MxV
YES
reference 100.00% (In.10). It is configured to introduce the speed reference through the V1
In.11 analog input. The value is a percentage of G5.1 MxFA (In.1).
G5.12 A1NMn=-10.00V [24] V1 minimum -10.00 to Define the negative minimum voltage for the analog input 1, according to
YES
In.12 [24] negative voltage 0.00V the connected sensor characteristics.
Set the speed reference corresponding to the analog input 1 minimum
G5.13 A1MnR=-10.00% [24] negative range. Is corresponds to the minimum voltage level set in G5.12
V1 minimum -100.00 to
A1NMn (In.12). It is configured to introduce the speed reference through YES
negative reference 0.00%
In.13 [24] the analog input. The value is a percentage of the frequency adjusted in
parameter G5.1 MxFA (In.1).
G5.14 A1MxV=-10.00V [24] V1 maximum -10.00 to Define the maximum negative voltage for the analog input 1 according to
YES
In.14 [24] negative voltage 0.00V the connected sensor characteristics.

G5.15 A1Mx=-10.00% [24] Set the speed reference corresponding to the analog input 1 maximum
V1 maximum -100.00 to negative range. It corresponds to the maximum voltage level set in G5.13
YES
negative reference 0.00% A1MnR (In.13). It is configured to introduce the speed reference through
In.15 [24] an analog input. The value is a percentage of G5.1 MxFA (In.1).
G5.16 V1 Invert=N N Inverts the direction of rotation. Set this parameter to 1 (NO) if you need the
V1 Inverting YES
In.16 Y motor to run in the opposite direction from the current rotation.
Set the voltage analog input 1 quantification level. It is used when too much
G5.17 A1DeLl=0.04% noise is present within the analog input signals. The quantification value is
defined as the analog input 1 maximum percentage value. For example, if
Adjust V1 0.04 to the input maximum value is 10V and the quantification level is 1%, the
YES
quantification 10.00% frequency will change in 0.05Hz (when the maximum frequency is 50Hz),
in 0.1V intervals. As the input voltage increases or decreases, the output
In.17 frequency will differ, removing the fluctuation effect within the analog input
value.
G5.35 AngIN2=0.00V [25] 0.00 to
V2 Monitor Voltage analog input 2 monitor. YES
In.35 [25] 12.00V

G5.37 A2LPF=10ms [25] Set the time response against a change produced in the speed reference,
V2 filter 0 to 10000ms so that it can reduce the speed fluctuation due to unstable signs or noise. NO
In.37 [25] Thus, the response becomes slower.
G5.38 A2MnC=0.00V [25] V2 minimum 0.00 to Define the minimum current for the analog input 2 according to the
In.38 [25] voltage 10.00V connected sensor characteristics.
Set the speed reference corresponding to the analog input 2 minimum
G5.39 A2MnR=0.00% [25] range. It corresponds to the minimum voltage level set in G5.38 A2MnC
V2 minimum 0.00 to
(In.38). It is configured to introduce the speed reference through the analog YES
reference 100.00%
In.39 [25] input. The value is a percentage of the frequency adjusted in parameter
G5.1 MxFA (In.1).
G5.40 A2MxC=10.00V [25] V2 maximum 0.00 to Define the maximum current for the analog input 2, according to the
YES
In.40 [25] current 10.00V connected sensor characteristics.

G5.41 A2MxR=100.00% Set the speed reference corresponding to the analog input 2 maximum
[25] range. It corresponds to the maximum current level set in G5.40 A2MxC
V2 maximum 0.00 to
(In.40). It is configured to introduce the speed reference through the analog YES
reference 100.00%
In.41 [25] input. The value is a percentage of the frequency adjusted in parameter
G5.1 MxFA (In.1).
G5.46 V2 Invert=N [25] YES
V2 Inverting Same as G5.16 V1 Invert (In.16), but for the voltage analog input 2. YES
In.46 [25] NO
G5.47 A2DeLl=0.04% [25] Adjust I2 0.04 to
Same as G5.17 A1DeLl (In.17), but for the voltage analog input 2. YES
In.47 [25] visualization 10.00%
G5.50 AnI2=0.00mA [26] 0.00 to
I2 Monitor Used to monitor current analog input 2. NO
In.50 [26] 24.00mA
G5.52 AI2LF=10ms [26] Configures the time for the operation frequency to reach 63% of target
I2 filter 0 to 10000ms YES
In.52 [26] frequency based on the input current at the analog input 2.

[24] Displayed if G5.6 (ln.6 in integrated display) is configured as bipolar (10V).


[25] Displayed when V is selected on the analog current/voltage input circuit selection switch (SW2).
[26] Displayed when I is selected on the analog current/voltage input circuit selection switch (SW2).

44 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G5.53 A3MnC=4.00mA [26] I2 minimum 0.00 to
Same as G5.38 A2MnC (In.38), but for the current analog input 2. YES
In.53 [26] current 20.00mA
G5.54 A3MnR=0.00% [26] I2 minimum 0.00 to
Same as G5.13 A1MnR (In.13), but for the current analog input 2. YES
In.54 [26] reference 100.00%
G5.55 A2MxC=20.00mA
[26] I2 maximum 0.00 to
Same as G5.40 A2MxC (In.40), but for the current analog input 2. YES
current 24.00mA
In.55 [26]
G5.56 A2MxR=100.00%
[26] I2 maximum 0.00 to
Same as G5.11 A1MxR (In.11), but for the current analog input 2. YES
reference 100.00
In.56 [26]
G5.61 I2 Invert=N [26] N
I2 Inverting Same as G5.16 V1 Invert (In.16), but for the current analog input 2. YES
In.61 [26] Y
G5.62 A2DeLl=0.04% [26] Adjust I2 0.04 to
Same as G5.17 A1DeLl (In.17), but for the current analog input 2. YES
In.62 [26] visualization 10.00%
Digital Inputs configuration for individual use.

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


G5.65 DI1=START(+) 0 None Not programmed entry.
Send the start command through an open contactor
1 START(+) (NO). The operation of the Digital Input varies when
3 WIRE is selected.
Send the reverse start command through an open
Digital input 1 2 START(-) contactor (NO). The operation of the Digital Input NO
varies when 3 WIRE is selected.
3 RESET Send a Reset command through digital inputs. (NO)
Trigger an external fault to stop the drive through
In.65 digital inputs (NO). Is advisable to invert the digital
4 EXTTRIP input logic configured as Extreme Fault and set it as
contact (NC). See parameter G5.87 (In.87).
Stop the drive by removing the motor output power
5 DISSTART supply, forcing a stop by inertia. (NO)
Enable the speed reference programmed in G1.11
6 INCH1 InchFq (dr.11). (NO)
Bit 0 speed reference. Allows selecting the multiple
7 SPEED-L preconfigured speed references. See G2.50 to
G2.56 (bA.50 to bA.56) (NO).
G5.66 DI2=START(-)
Bit 1 speed reference. Allows selecting the multiple
8 SPEED-M preconfigured speed references. See G2.50 to
G2.56 (bA.50 to bA.56) (NO).
Bit 2 speed reference. Allows selecting the multiple
Digital input 2 0 to 54 9 SPEED-H preconfigured speed references. See G2.50 to NO
G2.56 (bA.50 to bA.56) (NO).
Bit 0 for alternative acceleration ramps. Allows the
selection of the multiple preconfigured
11 XCEL-L acceleration/deceleration ramps. See G2.70 to
In.66 G2.83 (bA.70 to bA.83).
Bit 1 for alternative acceleration ramps. Allows the
selection of the multiple preconfigured
12 XCEL-M acceleration/deceleration ramps. See G2.70 to
G2.83 (bA.70 to bA.83).
13 RUNEnable Sets the digital input to safe operation mode.
Configure digital inputs for a behaviour with
pushbuttons. This input is set as NC and acts as stop
to a start command.
G5.67 DI3=RESET Example:
14 3-WIRE DI1 = 1 START(+) (NO)
DI2 = 14 3 WIRE (NC)
DI3 = 18 DOWN (NO)
This way, the DI1 button orders to start and the DI2
Digital input 3 orders to stop. The DI3 button decreases the speed.
NO
Enable the alternative control mode programmed in
15 CTR/REF2 G2.4 Alt Ctrl Mode (bA.4) (NO).

In.67

Note: Continues on the next page.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 45


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display

Note: Comes from the previous page.

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


This option switches motor power supply from the
G5.68 DI4=RESET drive with direct network supply. To do this, digital
output options 17 Line in and 18 Line Co are used.
While the digital input is open, the digital output
configured as 17 Line in remains active. Once this
digital input is closed, the relay Line in is disabled,
waits for 500ms and enables Line Co. When this
digital input in disabled, Line Co is disabled, waits
Digital input 4 for 500ms, enables Line In and performs a speed NO
search to sinchronize with the motor.

16 Exchange

In.68

Assign the function to increase the speed reference


17 UP through a button (NO) to the digital input. reference
limits are those set in G1 Drive (dr).
Set digital input to decrease the speed reference by
18 DOWN the use of a button (NO). The reference limits will be
those set on G.1 Drive.
G5.69 DI5= SPEED-L Reset to 0 the speed reference of the motorized
potentiometer. This way, even if parameter G3.65
20 POTCLEAR (Ad.65) is set to NO, when restarting the drive, the
drive will operate at the reference set in G1.1 Local
Speed (dr.1).
Set a speed reference from an analog input to the
present activation time value. When this digital input
Digital input 5 21 AnalogHLD is active, the drive will ignore any change produced NO
in the analog input reference (NO).
Reset the accumulated error by the integral PID
22 I-Term Clear function.
Allow disabling the PID function. When it is disabled,
the control PID will be resumed.
In.69 23 PIDOPLoop Note: This option must be used when the PID
reference is set by analogue input. If PID reference is
set by display, use option INCH1.
24 PGain2 Set the proportional gain 2 for PID operation.
Sets the digital input to stop acceleration or
deceleration.

25 XCELStop

G5.70 DI6= SPEED-M


Set the digital input as 2nd motor operation, which is
26 2ndMotor used when a single drive switch operates two motors.
Enable the motor pre-excitation activation, before
start. The user can adjust this functionality in
34 Pre-Excit parameters G3.7 START, G3.12 DCSt T and
Digital input 6 G3.13 DC Curr (Ad.7, Ad.1 and Ad.13). NO
Set the function for the temporized digital output. If
option 28 Timer-Ou is selected in G6.31 (OU.31) or
G6.36 (OU.33), the digital output will be enabled
38 TimerIN once the time set in G6.56 (OU.56) has elapsed.
Once this digital input is disabled, the digital output
will be disabled once the time set in G6.57 (OU.57)
In.70 has elapsed.

Note: Continues on the next page.

46 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
Note: Comes from the previous page.

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


This digital input sets the main reference + alternative
reference functionality. When drive speed is
40 disAuxRef. controlled by the main reference source, if this input
G5.71 DI7= SPEED-H is enabled, the speed reference will be calculated
according to parameter G2.2 (ba.2).
46 INCH(+) Enable the direct starting fix speed reference to the
47 INCH(-) one set in parameter G1.11 InchFq (dr.11).
Bit 2 for alternative acceleration ramps. Allows the
selection of the multiple preconfigured
Digital input 7 49 XCEL-H NO
acceleration/deceleration ramps. See G2.70 to
G2.83 (bA.70 to 83).
Enables the user to implement simple sequences
50 PLC using various function blocks.
The drive runs in Fire mode when G3.80 (Ad.80) is
51 FireMode set to 2 and the multifunction terminal (G5.65-71, In
In.71 65-71) configured for Fire mode is turned on.
For kinetic energy buffering operation, select the
52 KEB1Sel multifunction terminal, set it to KEB1Sel and enable
the digital input.
In IP66 equipment, pulse input TI and Multi-function
54 TI terminal P5 share the same therminal. In this case,
set parameter G5.69 (In.69) to 54(TI).

85 DIOnF=10ms Digital input Set the delay time when activating the digital input. In case any variation
0 to 10000ms YES
In.85 activation delay occurs within a smaller time gap, the input will remain disabled.
86 DIOfF=3ms Digital input Set the delay time when disabling a digital input. In case any variations
0 to 10000ms YES
In.86 deactivation delay occur within a smaller time gap, the input will remain enabled.
Allows defining the digital inputs as normally open contactors (YES). or
normally closed (NC).
87 DCTy=0000000
BIT SETTING DESCRIPTION
Digital input 0000000 to 0 Contact normally open (YES)
NO
contact type 1111111 1 Contact normally closed (NC)
In.87
The assignment order is P1, P2, , P7 starting from the bit placed farthest
to the right. The number of Digital Inputs varies depending on the equipment
(IP20 drives integrate 7 Digital Inputs and IP66 drives integrate 5).
89 DiScan=1ms Set the time to wait before refreshing the digital inputs configured as
DI scan time 1 to 5000ms NO
In.89 multireference.
Shows the status of digital inputs:
90 StDI=0000000
BIT SETTING DESCRIPTION
Digital inputs 0000000 to 0 Contact normally open (NO)
status 1111111 1 Contact normally closed (NC)
In.90 The assignment order is P1, P2, , P7 starting from the bit placed farthest
to the right. The number of Digital Inputs varies depending on the equipment
(IP20 drives integrate 7 Digital Inputs and IP66 drives integrate 5).
91 TIPls=0.00kHz 0.00 to
TI Monitor This parameter shows the pulse frequency in this input.
In.91 50.00kHz
92 TIFlt=10 This parameter allows setting the time in which the pulse input reaches 63%
TI Filter 0 to 9999 of its nominal frequency. It is useful when the pulse frequency is supplied YES
In.92 in multiple steps.

93 TIMn=0.00kHz
TI minimum input 0.00 to PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
This parameter allows setting the minimum input YES
frequency 32.00kHz G5.93/In93
frequency through TI.
In.93
This parameter allows setting the minimum input
G5.94/In94
frequency percentage through TI.
This parameter allows setting the maximum input
94 TIMnR=0.00% G5.95/In95
TI minimum input frequency through TI.
0.00 to This parameter allows setting the maximum input
frequency G5.96/In96 YES
100.00% frequency percentage through TI.
percentage
In.94

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 47


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display

95 TIMx=32.00kHz
TI maximum input 0.00 to
YES
frequency 32.00kHz
In.95

96 TIMxR=100.00%
TI maximum input
0.00 to
frequency YES
100.00%
percentage
In.96

97 TI Invert=N N This parameter allows inverting the TI signal. Set this parameter to 1 (NO)
TI Inverting YES
In.97 Y if you need a reverse signal.
98 TIDeLl=0.04% TI noise reduction 0.04 to This parameter is used to reduce noise in the TI input signal. The
YES
In.98 level 10.00% quantification value is defined as the input maximum percentage value.
Software status. Set each bit to 0 or 1 according to the following table:
99 IOSWST=00 BIT SETTING DESCRIPTION
00 V2, NPN
Input mode setting 00 to 11 01 V2, PNP NO
10 I2, NPN
In.99 11 I2, PNP

5.7. Group 6 G6: Outputs OU


Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
The analog output 1 is programmable according to the following table:

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


Proportional signal to the motor speed. For the
maximum frequency defined in G10.20
0 Frequency
MsSpL (M2.20), analogue value will be
10V/20mA.
Proportional signal to the motor current.
1 O/pCurr 10V/20mA are generated when the drive rated
current is at 200%.
Proportional signal to the motor voltage. For
the voltage value defined in G2.15 MTR
2 O/pVolt
VOLT (bA.15), analogue value will be
10V/20mA.
Proportional signal to the bus DC voltage. The
Analog output 1 analogue output is 10V/20mA when the DC
G6.1 AO1=Frequency 0 to 15 3 DCLinkV YES
mode selection voltage is 410Vdc for 220Vac drives and
820Vdc for 400Vac drives.
Proportional signal to the generated torque.
4 Torque Outputs 10V/20mA at 250% of motor rated
torque.
Proportional signal to the output power.
5 O/pPower 10V/20mA are generated operating 200% of
the nominal power.
6 Idse Maximum current at 200% of no load current.
Maximum current at 250% of rated torque
7 Iqse
current.
Proportional signal to the target frequency set
8 TargetFq
in the drive.

Note: continues on the next page.

48 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display

Note: comes from the previous page

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


Proportional signal to the frequency which has
executed the acceleration and deceleration
9 RampFreq
functions and it can be different to the real
output frequency.
10 SpeedFdb Real motor speed.
OU.1
PID reference value signal. Generates 6.6V
12 PIDRefVal
working to the 100% of the reference.
Signal proportional to the feedback in PID
13 PIDFdbVal mode. Generates 6.6V at 100% of the
reference value.
Signal proportional to the PID controller output
14 PIDO/p value. Generates 5V at 100% of the reference
value.
15 Constant G6.5 AO1Con (OU.5) value.
These parameters allow adjusting the gain and offset level of the analogue
G6.2 AO1Ga=100.0% output 1. If a current signal is desired, the set value will be 20%.
Analog output 1 -1000.0 to
For example, when the analogue output is configured as Frequency, the YES
gain 1000.0%
OU.2 equation that governs the operation is:


G6.3 AO1Ofs=0.0% 1 = 1 + 1

Analog output 1 -100.0 to
YES
offset 100.0%
OU.3 where Gain AO1 is set in parameter G6.2 and Offset AO1 is set in
parameter G6.3 (OU.2 and OU.3, respectively).

G6.4 AO1Fil=5ms Filter for the analog output 1 value.


Analog output 1 Occasionally, the analog signal is slightly unstable. It can be improved
0 to 10000ms YES
filter selecting another filter value.
OU.4
Note: The use of a filter can add a slight delay within the analog output
G6.5 AO1Con=0.0% Analog output 1 Set a constant speed in the analog output 1, whenever it has been
0.0 to 100.0% YES
OU.5 constant setting configured as Constant in parameter G6.1 AO1 (OU.1).
G6.6 ANOUT1=0.0% Analog output 1 0.0 to
Analog output 1 monitor. YES
OU.6 monitor 1000.0%
This parameter allows setting when the relay output is set as 29 FAULT:
OPT FUNCTION
G6.30 OP FLT RLY=010
001 Fault due to low voltage.
010 Any faults other than low voltage.
Relay fault output 000 to 111 YES
Automatic restart final failure.
Final fault automatic restart. The relay will enable whenever all
OU.30 100
restarting attempts have been carried out (as set in G9.9 Retry
Num, Pr.9) or time set in G9.10 Retry Dly (Pr.10) has elapsed.
Configures each relay and digital output according to the following table:
OPT
DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
.
0 None The output has no effect.
Check when the output frequency has reached
the user defined frequency. The relay will be
1 FDT-1
enabled if the following equation is satisfied:
F output > frequency ([G9.2 FDTBnd] / 2).
The relay is active whenever the reference
2 FDT-2 frequency is set to [G9.1 FDTLvl] and is [G9.2
Relay 1 control FDTBnd] in bandwidth
G6.31 RLY1=Trip 0 to 35 YES
source
The relay will enable in the frequencies:
3 FDT-3 [G9.1 FDTLvl] ([G9.2 FDTBnd]/2) to [G9.1
FDTLvl] + ([G9.2 FDTBnd]/2).
The relay will be active whenever the output
frequency is greater than [G9.1 FDTLvl]
4 FDT-4
remains closed until it decreases below [G9.1
FDTLvl] ([G9.2 FDTBnd]/2).

Note: continues on the next page.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 49


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display

Note: comes from the previous page

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


The relay will be active when the motor is in
5 OverLoad
overload.
The relay will be active in case a fault due to
6 IOL
overload protection occurs.
The relay will be active in case of an underload
7 UndrLoad
warning.
The relay will be active in case a fan fault
8 VentWarn occurs and parameter G9.79 (Pr.79) is set as
1 WARN.
Digital output will be enable when the motor is
9 Stall
blocked and overcharged.
The relay will enable whenever the drive DC
10 OverVolt bus voltage is higher than the protection
voltage.
The relay will be active whenever the drive DC
11 LowVolt link voltage drops below the low voltage
protection level.
The relay will enable when the drive
12 OverHeat
temperature reaches a dangerous level.
13 Lost Command Communications have been interrupted.
The relay will enable with the start command.
14 Run
However, it will not enable during the DC brake.
The relay will always enable whenever no start
15 Stop command has been sent and no output voltage
is present within the drive.
The relay will enable when the reference
frequency matches the output frequency, this
16 Steady
is, when the drive has reached the reference
OU.31 frequency.
Outputs a signal while the motor is driven by the
17 Inv. Line
inverter line
Outputs a signal while the motor is controlled
from the communications network. See option
18 Comm Line
16 Exchange of digital inputs configuration
(parameters G5.65-G5.71, In.65-71).
The relay will be active during a speed search
19 Spd Srch
operation.
The relay will enable whenever the drive is
22 Ready
ready to start (without any warnings or trips).
The relay will be enabled after the set time has
28 Timer Out
elapsed.
29 Trip Relay is enabled when a fault trip occurs.
Sets the configuration of the braking resistor
31 DBWarn%ED
(%ED: Duty cycle).
34 Comparat Sends a signal using the value of the dig.input.
35 BRCtrl Used to control the brake opening.
The relay will enable CAP exchange options
36 CAP Exch.
according to the setting of G9.62 (Pr.62).
The relay will enable FAN exchange according
37 FAN Exch.
to the setting of G9.87 (Pr.87).
38 Fire Mode Fire mode configuration.
Sends pulse signals to external devices to
provide a single output value of output
39 TO
frequency, output current, output voltage or DC
voltage.
The relay will be active when the energy
buffering operation has started because of low
40 KEB Op.
voltage of the drive DC power section due to a
power failure on the input power.

G6.33 DOP1=Run Digital ouput 1


0 to 35 See G6.31 (OU.31). YES
OU.33 function

50 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
Multi-function output monitor.
G6.41 DO Sts=00
OPTION FUNCTION
Digital ouputs
00 to 11 00 No ouputs enabled YES
status
01 Output 1 enabled
OU.41 10 Output 1 enabled
11 Output 1 and 2 enabled
G6.50 TRLON=0.00s The user can specify a delay in the digital output 1 and relays disconnection.
Digital output 0.00 to
If during the connection delay time the activation condition disappears, the YES
OU.50 connection delay 100.00s
relay will not be enabled.
G6.51 TRLOF=0.00s Digital output The user can specify a delay within the digital output 1 and relays
0.00 to
disconnection disconnection. If during the disconnection delay time, the disable condition YES
OU.51 100.00s
delay disappears, the relay will not be disabled.
Defines the type of contact following this order: Digital Output 1, Relay 2
G6.52 INV YES/NC=00 and Relay 1, from left to right according to the bit assignment.
NC/NO Relays
0 to 1 OPTION FUNCTION YES
logic
OU.52 0 Contact normally open (NO)
1 Contact normally closed (NC)

G6.53 TOnDl=0.00s Digital output


0.00 to
connection delay YES
OU.53 100.00s If a fault trip occurs, trip relay or multi-function output operates after the time
on fault
delay set in G6.53 (OU.3). Terminal is off with the input initialized after the
G6.54 TOfDl=0.00s Digital output time delay set in G6.54 (OU.54).
0.00 to
disconnection YES
OU.54 100.00s
delay on fault
G6.55 TiOnD=0.00s Digital output 0.00 to
Input a signal (On) to the timer terminal to operate a timer output (Timer YES
OU.55 connection delay 100.00s
out) after the time set at G6.55 (OU.55) has passed. When the multi-
G6.56 TOfDl=0.00s Digital output function input terminal is off, multi-function output or relay turns off after the
0.00 to time set at G6.56 (OU.56). See also digital inputs option 38 Timer In.
disconnection YES
OU.56 100.00s
delay
G6.57 FDTLv=30.00Hz 0.00 to
Relay FDT level Value of the output frequency for digital outputs FDT options. YES
OU.57 [G1.20]/dr.20
G6.58 FDTBd=10.00Hz 0.00 to
Relay FDT band Detection frequency band for digital outputs FDT options. YES
OU.58 [G1.20]/dr.20
Pulse output setting.
OPT. DESCRIPTION OPT. DESCRIPTION
G6.61 TOM=Frequency 0 Frequency 8 TargetFq
1 O/pCurr 9 RampFreq
2 O/pVolt 10 SpeedFdb
Pulse output mode 0 to 15 YES
3 DCLinkV 12 PIDRefVal
4 Torque 13 PIDFdbVal
OU.61 5 O/pPower 14 PIDO/p
6 Idse 15 Constant
7 Iqse
G6.62 TOGa=100.0% -1000.0 to Adjusts output value and offset. If frequency is selected as an output, it
Pulse output gain YES
OU.62 1000.0% will operate according to the following equation:
G6.63 TOOfs=0.0% -100.0 to
Pulse output offset 0 = YES
OU.63 100.0%

G6.64 TOFil=5ms
Pulse output filter 0 to 10000ms Sets filter time constant on analog output. YES
OU.64
G6.65 TOCon=0.0% Pulse output If analog output item is set to constant, the analog pulse output is dependent
0.0 to 100.0% YES
OU.65 constant setting on the set parameter values.
G6.66 TO=0.0% Pulse output 0.0 to Monitors analog output value. Displays the maximum output pulse
YES
OU.66 monitor 1000.0% (32kHz) as a percentage (%) of the standard.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 51


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

5.8. Group 7 G7: Communication Bus CM

NOTE: Parameters CM.6 to CM.96 are only available in the integrated display.

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G7.1 Slave Addr=1 Drive identifier to communicate within the network. When communicating
Slave address 1 to 250 YES
CM.1 with several equipments, each one should have a different address.
Select the communication protocol:
G7.2 Prot=Modbus [27]
RS-485 OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Modbus
communication Communication protocol compatible ith YES
PE BUS 485 0 Modbus
protocol Modbus-RTU
CM.2 [27]
Communication protocol used to communicate
2 PE BUS 485
drives.

1200 bps
G7.3 BaudR=9600bps [27] 2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps Sets the Modbus communications transfer rate, which must match with the
Baud rate YES
19200 bps bus communication master within the drive.
38400 bps
CM.3 [27] 56 Kbps
112 Kbps

Select the communication frame structure and defines the data length,
G7.4 Mode=D8/PN/S1 [27] parity confirmation method and the number of stop bits:

Communication OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


0 to 3 0 D8/PN/S1 8-bit data / no parity check / 1 stop bit YES
frame structure
1 D8/PN/S2 8-bit data / no parity check / 2 stop bits
CM.4 [27] 2 D8/PE/S1 8-bit data / even parity / 1 stop bit
3 D8/PO/S1 8-bit data / odd parity / 1 stop bit

G7.5 RespDly=5ms [27] The MODBUS-RTU communication plays the role of the slave device. The
slave will reply after the time period set in this parameter. This allows the
Response delay 0 to 100.0 ms YES
master device attending the communications within a system where the
CM.5 [27] master can not manage a quick slave answer.
Communication Show the software version of the optional communications card, if there is
CM.6=0.00 [28] - YES
option S/W version any connected.
Communication
CM.7=1 [28] 0 to 255 Identifier of the communications card connected to the drive. YES
option ID
CM.8=12Mbps [28] Card baud rate - Communications card baud rate. YES
Communication
CM.9 [28] - This parameter function depends on the communications card. YES
option LED status
Configure a group of addresses to read several output parameters at once.
Output parameters
CM.30=3 0 to 8 The user must set the number of parameters and then configure them in YES
number
CM.31-38.
CM.31=40011[29] YES
CM.32=40012 [29] YES
CM.33=40013 [29]
Define the output parameter group for data transmission, so that addresses YES
CM.34=40001 [29] Output configured in CM.31-38 ca be used to send several parameters at once in YES
communication 0 to 65535 the same communications frame.
CM.35=40001 [29] addresses 1 to 8 YES
CM.36=40001 [29] The size of the group is set in CM.30 YES
CM.37=40001 [29] YES
CM.38=40001 [29] YES

[27] Will not be displayed when P2P and MultiKD is set.


[28] Will only be displayed when a communications optional card is installed.
[29] Only parameters corresponding to the value set in CM.30 will be shown (E.g., if CM.30 = 3, parameters CM.31, CM.32
and CM.33 will be shown).

52 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
Configure a group of addresses to read several input parameters at once.
Number of input
CM.50=2 0 to 8 The user must set the number of parameters and then configure them in YES
parameters
CM.31-38.
CM.51=40006 [30] NO
CM.52=40007 [30] NO
CM.53=40001 [30]
Define the input parameter group for data transmission, so that addresses NO
CM.54=40001 [30] Input configured in CM.51-58 ca be used to send several parameters at once in NO
communication 0 to 65535 the same communications frame.
CM.55=40001 [30] NO
addresses 1 to 8
CM.56=40001 [30] The size of the group is set in CM.50 NO
CM.57=40001 [30] NO
CM.58=40001 [30] NO
Field bus data NO Swap the most significant byte with the least significant byte in order to
CM.68=NO NO
swap YES adapt to the PLC configuration.
CM.70=Nada Multi function inputs can be controlled by using the communication address YES
40902. Configure parameters CM.70-77 and then set the corresponding bit
CM.71=Nada in address 40803 for them to operate. YES
CM.72=Nada This inputs operate independently from those set in G5.65-71 (In.65-71). YES
CM.73=Nada YES
OPC. DESCRIPCIN OPC. DESCRIPCIN
CM.74=Nada 0 None 20 POTCLEAR YES
CM.75=Nada 1 START(+) 21 AnalogHLD YES
2 START(-) 22 I-Term Clear
CM.76=Nada 3 RESET 23 PIDOPLoop YES
4 EXTTRIP 24 PGain2
5 DISSTART 25 XCELStop
Communication 6 INCH1 26 2ndMotor
multifunction input 0 to 54
7 SPEED-L 34 Pre-Excit
1 to 7
8 SPEED-M 38 TimerIN
9 SPEED-H 40 disAuxRef.
11 XCEL-L 46 INCH(+)
12 XCEL-M 47 INCH(-)
CM.77=Nada YES
13 RUNEnable 49 XCEL-H
14 3-WIRE 50 PLC
15 CTR/REF2 51 FireMode
16 Exchange 52 KEB1Sel
17 UP 54 TI
18 DOWN
Note: Refer to section 5.6, parameters G5.65-71 (In.65-71), to consult
detailed information about each option.
Communication
CM.86=0 multifunction input - Monitor inputs configured in CM.70-77. NO
monitoring
Data frame comm. PE BUS 485 Monitor data frames status through the communication bus or the
CM.90= PE BUS 485 YES
monitor Rem. display removable display
Received data
CM.91=0 0 to 65535 Count the number frames that have been correctly received. YES
frames counter
Frames with error
CM.92=0 0 to 65535 Count the number frames that have been received with errors. YES
counter
NAK frames
CM.93=0 0 to 65535 Count the number frames that have been received with timeout. YES
counter
G7.94 ComUpdate=N [31] Communications NO This parameter enables sendind the current drive data configuration to the
YES
CM.94=NO [31] update YES communications card.

[30] Only parameters corresponding to the value set in CM.50 will be shown (E.g., if CM.50 = 2, parameters CM.51 and
CM.52 will be shown).
[31] Solo se muestra si se ha conectado una tarjeta de comunicaciones opcional.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 53


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
P2P communication allows sharing input devices between different drives.
To enable it, RS485 communication must be active.
This parameter allows defining which devices will be master and which
slave in the P2P communication.
P2P
CM.95=Deshabilitar
communication 0a3 NO
todas OPT. FUNCTION
selection
0 Disable All
1 P2P Master
2 P2P Slave
3 M-KPD Ready
When multi function outputs are used, a drive configured as P2P slave can
choose whether to use its own output or the drives output.
Digital output OPT. FUNCTION
CM.96=NO [32] 000 a 111 YES
selection 001 Analog output
010 Multi function relay
100 Multi funtion output

5.9. Group 8 G8: PID AP


Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G8.1 ApMod=Proc PID Application function selection.
Application 0: None
NO
AP.1 function selection 2: Proc PID
Set this parameter to 2 (Proc PID) to select functions for the process PID.
G8.2 UsSeqEn=N YES
Enable PLC mode Display the parameter groups related to a user sequence. NO
AP.2 NO
G8.16 PIDOut=+0.0% [33] -327.68 to Display the existing output value of the PID controller. The unit, gain, and
PID output YES
AP.16 [33] 327.68% scale set at G8.42-44 (AP.42-44) are applied.
G8.17 PIDRef=+50.00% -327.68 to
[33] 327.68% Display the existing reference value set for the PID controller. The unit, gain,
PID reference YES
and scale set at G8.42-44 (AP.42-44) are applied.
AP.17 [28]
G8.18 PIDFdb=+0.00% [33] -327.68 to Display the input value of the PID controller that is included in the latest
PID feedback 327.68% feedback. The unit, gain, and scale set at G8.42-44 (AP.42-44) are YES
AP.18 [33] applied.
G8.19 PIDLo=+50.00% [33] When G8.20 (AP.20) is set to 0 (MREF), the reference value can be
-100.00 to
PID local entered. If the reference source is set to any other value, the setting values YES
AP.19 [33] 100.00%
for G8.19 (AP.19) are voided.
Select the source to introduce the PID regulator set point:

OPT DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


0 MREF PID set point introduced from keypad. .
G8.20 SELREF=MREF [33] PID set point introduced by the voltage
1 V1
analog input 1.
PID set point introduced by the voltage
3 V2
analog input 2.
PID set point introduced by the current
Select PID 4 I2
0 to 8 analog input 2. NO
regulator source
PID set point introduced through the Modbus
5 MODBUS
communication protocol.
PID set point introduced through any of the
7 COMMS
optional communication boards.
AP.20 [33] 8 PLC PID set point introduced through PLC.
11 PULSE Reference signal through the pulse input.

Note: In case an unavailable option is selected, the parameter will return


to its previous value.

[32] Displayed when G8.1 (AP.1) is set to 2 (Proc PID).


[33] Displayed when G8.1 (AP.1 in integrated display) is set to Proc Pid.

54 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
Select the source through which the feedback signal will be introduced to
close the control loop.

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


G8.21 SELFBK=V1 [33]
0 V1 Feedback signal by voltage analog input 1.
2 V2 Feedback signal by voltage analog input 2.
3 I2 Feedback signal by current analog input 2.
Select feedback Feedback signal through Modbus
0 to 10 4 MODBUS NO
signal source communications integrated in the drive.
Feedback signal through any optional
6 COMMS
communication boards.
Feedback signal through the equipments
7 PLC
AP.21 [33] PLC.
10 PULSE Feedback signal through the pulse input.

Note: In case an unavailable option is selected, the parameter will return


to its previous value.
G8.22 GANKp=+50.0% [33] PID controller Set the value of the proportional gain controller. This value should be
0.0 to
increased whenever a greater control response is needed. Note: Increasing YES
AP.22 [33] proportional gain 1000.0%
too much this value can cause a greater system instability.

23 INTEGRL=10.0ms [33] Set the regulator integration time. In case greater precision is needed, YES
PID controller increase this value.
0 to 200.0s
integration time
AP.23 [33] Note: Increasing this value may slow down the system.

G8.24 DIFFE=0ms [33] Set the regulator differential time. Whenever a greater response is needed,
PID controller this value can be increased.
0.0 to 1000ms YES
differential time
AP.24 [33] Note: Increasing too much this value can cause a precision loss.
G8.25 GAINF=+0.0% [33] PID output fine Apply a fine adjustment at the PID output. Use this parameter when an
0.0 to 100.0% YES
AP.25 [33] adjustment adjustment for the proportional constant below 0.1% is required.
G8.26 PGaSca=100.0% This parameter, along with G8.22 (AP.22) allow setting output ratio for
[33] Proportional gain
0.0 to 100.0% errors between reference and feedback. If G8.22 (AP.22) is set to 50%, NO
scale
AP.26 [33] then 50% of the error is output. For ratios below 0.1% use G8.26 (AP.26).
Used when the output of the PID controller changes too fast or the entire
G8.27 PIDFl=0ms [33] system is unstable, due to severe oscillation. In general, a lower value
PID Filter 0 to 1000ms (default value=0) is used to speed up response time, but in some cases a YES
AP.27 [33] higher value increases stability. The higher the value, the more stable the
PID controller output is, but the slower the response time.
Set PID Mode.
G8.28 PIDMd=Process [33]
Process OPT. FUNCTION
PID Mode NO
Normal 0 Process
AP.28 [33]
1 Normal
G8.29 MxSL=+60.00Hz [33] Upper limit PID [G8.30] to
Set the PID output upper limit. YES
AP.29 [33] output 300.00Hz
G8.30 MnSL=-60.00Hz [33] Lower limit PID -300.00Hz to
Set the PID output lower limit. YES
AP.30 [33] output [G8.29]

Define whether to invert the PID output or not.

OPTION FUNCTION
G8.31 INVERT PID=N [33]
The PID regulator answers in normal mode. Therefore,
when the feedback value exceeds the reference signal, it
0: YES YES will decrease its speed. However, if the feedback is lower
Invert PID than the reference signal value, the speed will be NO
1: NO
increased.
The PID regulator answers in inverse mode. Therefore,
AP.31 [33] when the feedback exceeds the reference signal, speed
NO will be increased. However, when the feedback value is
lower than the reference signal, the speed will be
decreased.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 55


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G8.32 OutSc=+100.00%
[33]
0.1 to
PID output scale Set the PID regulator output magnitude. NO
1000.0%
AP.32 [33]

Set PID controller motion frequency.


G8.34 PPIDR=0.00Hz [33]
Pre-PID function allows configuring the drive to start at a fixed speed
0.00 to
PrePID reference (G8.34, AP.34) until PID feedback is above the set level (G8.35, AP.35). NO
[G1.20]/dr.20
AP.34 [33] If at a determined moment (G8.36, AP.36) the drive does not reach the
feedback level set in AP.35, fault F23 Pipe Fill Flt will be triggered.
G8.35 PPIDE=0.0% PrePID end
0.0 to 100.0% Set feedback level in PID mode. NO
AP.35 reference
G8.36 PPIDTim=600s
PrePID delay 0 to 9999s Set the PrePID time before triggering a fault F23 Pipe Fill Flt. YES
AP.36
G8.37 LPTSlp=60.0s Set the delay time before enabling the sleep mode. If the drive operates at
Sleep mode
0.0 to 999.9s a speed value under the value of G8.38 (AP.38), it will stop running and YES
AP.37 activation delay
enter in sleep mode.
G8.38 SlpSp=0.00Hz Set the speed under which if a time period greater than the one defined in
Sleep mode 0.00Hz to
parameter G8.37 (AP.37), the drive will stop operating and enter in sleep YES
AP.38 activation speed [G1.20]/dr.20
mode.
G8.39 LPPon=+35%
Awakening level 0 to 100% Set the resuming PID control level after a suspension period (sleep mode). YES
AP.39
Set PID wake-up mode, according to the following table:

OPT DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


G8.40 WkUPID=Below The PID operation starts when the
0 Below frequence is lower than the value set in
Below G8.39 (AP.39).
PID WakeUp
Above The PID operation starts when the YES
mode
Beyond 1 Above frequence is higher than the value set in
G8.39 (AP.39).
AP.40 The PID operation starts when the
difference between the reference value
2 Beyond
and the feedback variable is greater than
the value set in G8.39 (AP.39).
Set PID controller unit, according to the following table:

OPT DESCRIPTION OPT DESCRIPTION


G8.42 PIDUn=%
0 % 7 V
1 Bar 8 I
2 mBar 9 kW
PID unit 0 to 12 YES
3 Pa 10 HP
4 kPa 11 C
5 Hz 12 F
AP.42
6 rpm

Note: this parameter can only be adjusted in the removable LCD display.
G8.43 PIDuG=100.00% 0.00 to
PID unit gain Allows setting the PID unit gain. YES
AP.43 300.00%
Adjusts the size to fit the unit selected at G8.21 (AP.21).
G8.44 PIDUnSc=x1
OPT DESCRIPTION
0 x 100
PID scale unit 0 to 4 YES
1 x 10
2 x1
AP.44
3 x 0.1
4 x 0.01
G8.45 GaKp2=100.0% Set the value of the proportional gain controller 2. This value should be
Proportional gain 2 0.0 to 100.0% increased whenever a greater control response is needed. Note: Increasing NO
AP.45 too much this value can cause a greater system instability.

56 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

The following figure shows the PID operation sleep mode setting details:

5.10. Group 9 G9: Protections Pr


Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
Select the load type.
G9.4 Load Duty=Hevy
NRML OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Load duty type Selects the normal load type (variable torque) NO
HEVY 0 NRML
for applications such as fans or pumps.
Pr.4
Selects the heavy load type (constant torque)
1 HEVY
for applications such as elevators and cranes.
Select phase loss protection type.

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


G9.5 LSS PH=NONE
0 NONE Phase loss protection disabled.
1 OUTPUT Output phase loss protection enabled.
Input phase loss protection enabled. For its
Phase loss type 0 to 4 2 INPUT correct operation, the user should set the NO
parameter G9.6 (Pr.6).
Input and output phase loss protection
Pr.5 3 ALL enabled. For its correct operation, set the
parameter G9.6 (Pr.6).
Caution: Users should ensure that disabling this protection does not
compromise the operation of the installation and/or equipment.
G9.6 Ripple V=15V Set the DC Bus ripple voltage that must be exceeded to get a phase loss
Ripple voltage 1 to 100V phase input fault when G9.5 (Pr.5) is set as INPUT or ALL. This value NO
Pr.6 is set following customers requirements.
G9.7 FlDecT=3.0s Fault deceleration
0.0 to 600.0s Deceleration time at fault trip. YES
Pr.7 time

G9.8 Str Aft Rst=N N Parameters G9.9 and G9.10 (Pr.9 and Pr.10) only operate when G9.8
Start after restart (Pr.8) is set to 1(Yes). YES
Pr.8 Y
The number of attempts to try the auto restart is set at G9.9 (Pr.9).
G9.9 Retry Num=0 Retry attempts If a fault trip occurs during operation, the drive automatically restarts after
0 to 10 the set time programmed at G9.10 (Pr.10). YES
Pr.9 number
At each restart, the drive counts the number of tries and subtracts it from
G9.10 RetryDly=1.0s 34 the number set at G9.9 (Pr.9) until the retry number count reaches 0. After
an auto restart, if a fault trip does not occur within 60 secs, it will increase
Retry delay 0.0 to 60.0s YES
the restart count number. The maximum count number is limited by G9.10
Pr.10 [34] (Pr.10).

[34] Displayed when G9.9 (PR.9 in integrated display) is higher than zero.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 57


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
Set the action to be taken if the drive loses a speed reference:

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


0 None Protection is disabled.
G9.12 RIRLs=None The drive cuts the output voltage and allows
1 Free-Run
the motor free run.
The motor decelerates and then stops at the
2 Dec
time set at G9.7.
The drive will keep operating to the input value,
Response in case mean value obtained from the last 10 seconds
of a speed 0 to 5 3 Hold Input YES
until the moment the reference lo s has been
reference loss detected.
The drive will keep operating to the input value,
mean value obtained from the last 10 seconds
4 Hold Output
until the moment the reference loss has been
Pr.12 detected.
The drive operates to the frequency defined in
5 Lost Preset
parameter G9.14 (Pr.14).

Caution: Users should ensure that disabling this protection does not
compromise the operation of the equipment.
G9.13 RfLsDl=1.0s [35] Lost reference Delay time setting after which the speed reference loss protection will
0.1 to 120.0s YES
Pr.13 [35] delay enable.

G9.14 RfLRf=0.00Hz [35] In order to set the frequency value at which the drive will operate in case a
Reference for lost [G1.19] to
speed reference loss occurs. Therefore, the parameter G9.12 RIRLs YES
Pr.14 [35] reference [G1.20]/dr.20
(Pr.12) must be set to LostPreset.
G9.15 AILL=Half [35] Half
AI Lost Level Analog input loss decision level. YES
Pr.15 [35] Below
If the overload reaches the warning level, the terminal block multi-function
G9.17 OlWarnSel=YES output terminal and relay are used to output a warning signal. If 1 (Yes) is
selected, it will operate. If 0 (No) is selected, it will not operate.
Overload warning YES
YES
select NO OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Pr.17 0 YES Overload warning disabled.
1 NO Overload warning enabled.
G9.18 OLWrnL=+150% Overload warning The overload warning is a combination of the parameters G9.18, G9.19
30 to 200% YES
Pr.18 level and G9.20 (Pr.18-20). The drive will enable some of the digital outputs
configured as OverLoad whenever the current flowing within the motor is
G9.19 OLWrnT=10.0s Overload warning greater than the value defined in parameter G9.18 OLWrnL (Pr.18) during
0.0 to 30.0s YES
Pr.19 time the time established in parameter G9.19 OLWrnT (Pr.19).
The drive will take the following actions in case an overload fault occurs:

G9.20 OLTS=Freerun OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


0 None Protection is disabled.
Overload trip The drives output is cut, having as a
0 to 2 1 FreeRun YES
select consequence the motor free run.
A deceleration until stop is produced in the
2 Dec
Pr.20 time defined in parameter G9.7 Pr.7).
Caution: Users should ensure that disabling this protection does not
compromise the operation of the installation and/or equipment.
G9.21 OLLevel=180% The overload warning protection is a combination of the parameters G9.20,
Overload level 30 to 200% YES
Pr.21 G9.21 and G9.22 (Pr20-22). The drive will carry out the action selected in
parameter G9.20 OLTS (Pr.20) whenever the current flow within the motor
G9.22 OLTrpT=60.0s is greater than the parameter G9.21 OLLevel (Pr.21) value during the time
Overload trip time 0.0 to 60.0s YES
Pr.22 defined in parameter G9.22 OLTrpT (Pr.22).
Sets the underload warning options. Set to 1(Yes) and set the multi-function
G9.25 EnableUL=YES output terminals (at G6.31 and G6.33; OU.31 and OU.33) to Underload.
The warning signals are output when an underload condition arises.
YES
Enable underload YES
NO OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Pr.25 0 YES Underload warning disabled.
1 NO Underload warning enabled.

[35] Displayed when G9.12 is not set to None.

58 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G9.26 ULWnDl=10.0s Underload warning Set delay time when enabling the underload warning. The drive will wait this
0.0 to 600.0s YES
Pr.26 delay time before enabling the warning.
Set the underload fault trip protection.
G9.27 ULFM=None
None OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Underload fault 0 None Protection is disabled.
Free-Run YES
mode Output is blocked in an underload fault trip
Dec 1 Free-Run
Pr.27 situation.
2 Dec The motor decelerates and stops.
G9.28 ULFlDl=30.0 Underload fault
0.0 to 600.0s Set the delay time before triggering the underload fault. YES
Pr.28 delay
Heavy Duty:
G9.29 UlMnL=+30% G9.29 (Pr.29) is not supported. At G9.30 (Pr.30), underload level is
Underload
10 to 100% decided based on the motor rated current. YES
minimum level
Pr.29
Normal Duty:
At G9.29 (Pr.29), underload rate is decided based on twice the
G9.30 ULMxL=+30% operation frequency of the motor rated slip speed (G8.12).
Underload
10 to 100% At G9.30 (Pr.30), the underload rate is determined based on the YES
maximum level
Pr.30 frequency set at G4.18 (Cn.18). Upper and lower limits are based on
the drive rated current.
The drive will carry out one of the following actions whenever a fault is
present due to the fact that no motor has been connected to the drives
output terminal:
G9.31 NoMD=None
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
None
Action in case no 0 None Protection is disabled.
Free-Run YES
motor is detected The drives output is cut, having as a
Dec 1 Free-Run
consequence the motor free run.
Pr.31 2 Dec The motor decelerates and stops.

Caution: Users should ensure that disabling this protection does not
compromise the operation of the installation and/or equipment.
G9.32 NoMtrLv=+5% No motor fault The fault protection if no motor is detected is a combination of parameters
1 to 100% YES
Pr.32 level G9.31, G9.32 and G9.33 (Pr.31-33). The drive will carry out the action
set in parameter G9.31 NoMD whenever the current flowing within the
G9.33 NoMtrDl=3.0s No motor fault
0.1 to 10.0s motor does not exceed the value defined in parameter G9.32 NoMtrLvl YES
Pr.33 delay (Pr.32) during the time defined in parameter G9.33 NoMtrDl (Pr.33).
The drive will carry out one of the following actions in case of a motor
thermo-electronic fault:
G9.40 ThMM=None
Action in case of None OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
thermo-electronic Free-Run YES
0 None The ETH function is not activated.
fault Dec
The drive output is blocked. The motor coasts
Pr.40 1 Free-Run
to a halt (free-run).
2 Dec The drive decelerates the motor until it stops.
Select the drive mode of the cooling fan attached to the motor.

G9.41 MTCOOL=SELF OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


As the cooling fan is connected to the motor
Motor cooling axis, the cooling effect varies based on motor
SELF 0 SELF
mode at zero speed. Most universal induction motors have YES
FORCED this design.
speed
Additional power is supplied to operate the
Pr.41 cooling fan. This provides extended operation
1 FORCED
at low speeds. Motors designed for drives
typically have this design.
Set the current level which flows continuously during one minute in %
G9.42 ETH1min=150% referenced to the motor nominal current. The motor nominal current is set
Overcurrent level
50 to 200% in parameter G2.13 MTRCUR (bA.13). Whenever this limit is over passed, YES
during 1min
Pr.42 the thermo-electronic protection will be enabled, and the action defined in
parameter G9.40 ThMM (Pr.40) will be executed.
G9.43 ETHcont=+120% Continuous Set the overcurrent level under which the drive is able to work without
50 to 200% YES
Pr.43 overcurrent level enabling the thermo-electronic protection.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 59


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
Define trip mode in free run.
G9.45 BSMod=FreeRun

FreeRun OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


Free run trip mode NO
Dec The drive cuts the output voltage and allows
Pr.45 0 FreeRun
the motor free run.
1 Dec The motor decelerates and then stops.
Stall prevention can be configured for acceleration, deceleration, or while
operating a motor at constant speed.
G9.50 StallPR=00
OPT DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Stall prevention 00 to 11 00 Accelerating Stall protection during acceleration. NO
At constant Stall protection while operating at a constant
01
speed speed.
Pr.50
10 At deceleration Stall protection during deceleration.
11 FluxBraking Flux braking during deceleration.
G9.51 StFr1=60Hz Speed for stall [G1.19] to
YES
Pr.51 protection 1 [G9.53] Hz
G9.52 StlLev1=180% Level for stall
30 to 250% NO
Pr.52 protection 1
G9.53 StFr2=60Hz Speed for stall [G5.51] to
YES
Pr.53 protection 2 [G9.55] Hz
Additional stall protection levels can be configured for different frequencies,
G9.54 StlLev2=180% Level for stall
30 to 250% based on the load type. NO
Pr.54 protection 2 The stall level can be set above the base frequency. The lower and upper
G9.55 StFr3=60Hz limits are set using numbers that correspond in ascending order. For
Speed for stall [G5.53] to example, the range for Stall Frequency 2 (Stall Freq 2) becomes the lower
YES
Pr.55 protection 3 [G9.57] Hz limit for Stall Frequency 1 (Stall Freq 1) and the upper limit for Stall
G9.56 StlLev3=180% Frequency 3 (Stall Freq 3).
Level for stall
30 to 250% NO
Pr.56 protection 3
G9.57 StFr4=60Hz [G5.55] to
Speed for stall
[G1.20]/dr.20 YES
Pr.57 protection 4
Hz
G9.58 StlLev4=180% Level for stall
30 to 250% NO
Pr.58 protection 4
G9.59 FB Kp=0%
Flux braking gain 0 to 150[%] Set flux braking gain. YES
Pr.59
G9.60 CAPDgLV=0% CAP diagnosis
10 to 100[%] Set capacitors diagnosis percentage. YES
Pr.60 level
This parameter allows performing a capacitor diagnosis.

G9.61 CAPDg=+0%[36] OPT DESCRIPTION


0 Nonde
Capacitor
0 to 3 1 RefDiag (*) NO
diagnosis mode
2 PreDiag
Pr.61 [36] 3 InitDiag
(*) Note: This option is used to set a capacitance reference. It is
recommended to use it when the drive is operated for the first time.
G9.62 CAPExLv=0% [36] CAP exchange Sets the capacitor exchange warning level. The warning ECAP will be
0.0 to 95.0% NO
Pr.62 [36] warning level displayed when this value is reached.
G9.63 CAPDgL=0.0% [36] Capacitance This parameter shows the capacitance reference measured in G9.61. This
0.0 to 100.0% YES
Pr.63 [36] reference value must be equal to 100.0% when the drive is operated for the first time.
G9.66 DBWarnED=+0% Set braking resistor configuration (%ED: Duty cycle). Braking resistor
Braking resistor
0 to 30% configuration sets the rate at which the braking resistor operates for one YES
Pr.66 configuration
operation cycle.
G9.73 SpdDev=N Speed deviation N
Fault due to speed deviation. YES
Pr.73 fault Y

[36] These parameters are displayed when G9.60 is set to more than 0.

60 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G9.74 SpdDevLv=50 37 Speed deviation
1 to 20 Speed deviation band. YES
Pr.74 [37] band
G9.75 SpdDevTi=60 [37] Speed deviation
1 to 120 Speed deviation time. YES
Pr.75 [37] time
Select the action to carry out in case a fault within the cooling fan is
G9.79 FANTrip=Warn detected:
Action in case of Trip OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
YES
fan trip Warn 0 Trip The drive generates a Fan-trip.
Pr.79 The drive will enable the relay configured as
1 Warn
VentWarn.
Enable an optional card fault (if any is used). Set the operation mode for
the drive when a communication error occurs between the option card and
G9.80 TrpMd=FreeRun
the drive, or when the optional card is detached during operation.

Optional card trip OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


0 to 2 0 None No operation. YES
mode
The drive output is blocked and fault trip
Pr.80 1 FreeRun
information is shown on the display.
Motor decelerates to the value set at G9.7
2 Dec
(Pr.7).
G9.81 LVT Dly=0.0s Low voltage trip
0.0 to 60.0s It allows setting a delay for low voltage fault. NO
Pr.81 delay
G9.82 LV2 On=YES Enable low voltage YES When this parameter is set to NO and a low voltage situation occurs, the
NO
Pr.82 trip NO drive trips.
G9.86 FanTi=0% Fan use
0.0 to 100.0% This parameter allows showing the accumulated percent of fan usage. YES
Pr.86 percentage
G9.87 FanELv=90.0% Fan exchange Set fan exchange warning level. When the value is reached, the EFAN
0.0 to 100.0% YES
Pr.87 warning level warning appears.
G9.88 FanTiRst=N 38 YES
Fan time reset Sets the fan reset time. NO
Pr.88 [38] NO
Shows the status of capacitor fans.
G9.89 CAP FAN St=0
OPT DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
CAP fan status 00 to 11 There are no warnings neither in the capacitors YES
00 None
nor in fans.
Pr.89 01 CAP warning There is a warning in the capacitor.
10 FAN warning There is a warning in the fan.

[37] Displayed when G9.73 is set to YES.


[38] Will only be shown in the internal display.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 61


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

5.11. Group 10 G10: Second Motor M2


This group appears if any of G5.65 G5.71 (ln.65-71 in integrated display) is set to 26 (second motor).
In the following table, data shaded in grey will be displayed when a related code has been selected.

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G10.4 AccTi=20.0s Set the acceleration ramp for second motor adjustment. The established
Motor 2 setting within the parameter is the time required to reach the maximum
0.0 to 600.0s YES
M2.4 acceleration ramp frequency value, starting form 0Hz.This ramp will be set according to the
process necessities.
G10.5 DECEL=30.0s Set the deceleration ramp for second motor adjustment. The established
Motor 2 setting within the parameter is the time required to reach the maximum
0.0 to 600.0s YES
M2.5 deceleration ramp frequency value, starting form 0Hz.This ramp will be set according to the
process necessities.
0.2 kW
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
1.1 kW
G10.6 MTR2PWR=4.0Kw
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
3.0 kW
Motor 2 rated 3.7 kW
Set the second motor rated power according to its nameplate. NO
power 4.0 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
11.0 kW
M2.6
15.0 kW
18.5 kW
22.0 kW
30.0 kW
G10.7 MTRFRQ=60.00Hz 30.00 to
Motor 2 frequency Set the second motor frequency to rated value according to its nameplate. NO
M2.7 400.00Hz
Define the drive control type.
G10.8 Ctr. T=V/Hz OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Scalar control mode. Drive carries out the
Control type 0 V/Hz control applying a voltage / frequency ramp to
0 to 4 NO
selection the motor.
M2.8 Slip compensation mode. This mode reduces
2 SlipCom
the effect of motor slip.
4 S-less1 Sensorless control mode.
G10.10 POLE Numbr=4
(*)
Poles number 2, 4, 6 48 Set the number of poles in the motor according to its nameplate. NO
M2.10

G10.11 RtSlp=64rpm (*) When facing a heavy load capable of producing a big slip during the start,
Rated Slip 0 to 3000rpm NO
M2.11 configure this parameter to compensate the motor slip.
G10.12 MTRCUR=8.6A (*) Motor nominal
1.0 to 200.0A Set the motor nominal current in accordance with the nameplate. NO
M2.12 current

G10.13 NOLODC=3.1A (*) Set the measured current at rated frequency without load. If any difficulties
No load current 0.5 to 200.0A are found when measuring the current without load, this setting should be NO
M2.13 between 30% and 50% of the motor nameplate rated current.
G10.14 MTR VOLT=0V (*)
Motor 2 voltage 180 to 480V Set the motor rated voltage according to its nameplate. NO
M2.14
G10.15 EFFICIEN=+84%
(*) Motor 2 efficiency 70 to 100% Set the motor efficiency according to its nameplate. NO
M2.15
G10.16 InertiaRate=0 (*)
Motor 2 inertia rate 0 to 8 Set the load inertia rate.
M2.16 NO
G10.17 Rs=138.8m (*)
Stator resistor (*) Stator resistor fine setting. NO
M2.17

62 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G10.18 LSigma=1.244m
(*) Leak inductor (*) Leak inductor fine setting. NO
M2.18
G10.19 Ls=16.45mH (*)
Stator inductor (*) Inductor stator fine setting. NO
M2.19
G10.20 Tr=228ms 39 Rotor time
25 to 5000ms Rotor time constant fine setting. NO
M2.20 [39] constant
Set V/F pattern according to the following table:
G10.25 V/FPn=Linear
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
Output voltage increases and decreases at
0 Linear constant rate proportional to
V/F pattern 0 to 3 voltage/frequency (V/F) relation NO
Output voltage increases quadratically
1 Square
M2.25 according to the frequency. K=1.5.
2 V/F User Define a customized V/F pattern.
Output voltage increases quadratically
3 Square2
according to the frequency. K=2.
G10.26 FWBoost=+2.0% Torque in forward
direction 0.0 to 15.0% Set the intensified torque in forward direction. NO
M2.26
G10.27 RVBoost=+2.0% Torque in reverse
direction 0.0 to 15.0% Set the intensified torque in reverse direction. NO
M2.27
G10.28 StlLev1=150% Stall prevention
30 to 150% Set the stall prevention level. NO
M2.28 level motor 2
Set the current level which flows continuously during one minute in %
G10.29 ETH1min=+150% Motor 2 referenced to the motor nominal current. The motor nominal current is set
overcurrent level 100 to 200% in parameter G10.12 MTRCUR (M2.12). Whenever this limit is over NO
M2.29 during 1 minute passed, the thermo-electronic protection will be enabled, and the action
defined in parameter G9.40 ThMM (Pr.40) will be executed.
G10.30 ETHcont=+100% Motor 2 Set the overcurrent level under which the drive is able to work without
continuous 50 to 150% NO
M2.30 enabling the thermo-electronic protection.
overcurrent level

(*) These values depend on the motor setting.

[39] Displayed when G10.8 (M2.8 in integrated display) is set to S-less.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 63


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

5.12. Group 11 G11: PLC Sequence US


This group appears when G8.2 (AP.2) is set to 1 (NO) or CM.95 is set to 2 (P2P Master) (*).

A PLC sequence creates a simple sequence from a combination of different function blocks. The sequence
can comprise of a maximum of 18 steps using 29 function blocks and 30 parameters.

One loop refers to a single execution of a user configured sequence that contains a maximum of 18 steps.
Users can select a Loop Time of between 10-1,000ms.

The parameters for configuring PLC sequences configuration can be found in groups 11 and 12 of the
removable display; which are equivalent to groups US (for user sequence settings) and UF (for function
block settings).

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
This parameter allows setting the run and stop sequences.
G11.1 OpComm=Stop
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
0 Stop Stop PLC sequence.
PLC operation 1 The sequence will run continuously with the
0 to 2 Run NO
mode loop time set in G11.2 (US.2).
US.1 2 The sequence will run continuously with the
Run DI loop time set in G11.2 (US.2) while the digital
input set as 50 PLC is active.
0.01s
G11.2 LoopTime=0.02s 0.02s
0.05s
PLC loop time Set the PLC sequence loop time. NO
0.1s
US.2 0.5s
1s
G11.11 LkOut1=0 Output link Use registers G11.11 to G11.28 (US.11-28) to set the parameters to
address for PLC connect the 18 function blocks. If the input value is 0, an output value cannot
US.11 function 1 be used.
0 to 65535 NO
G11.12 LkOut2=0 Output link To use the output value in step 1 for the frequency reference (Cmd
address for PLC Frequency), enter the communication address (0x1101) of the Cmd
US.12 function 2 frequency as the Link UserOut1 parameter.

G11.27 LkOut17=0 Output link addr.
US.27 PLC function 17
0 to 65535 See G11.11 (US.11). NO
G11.28 LkOut18=0 Output link addr.
US.28 PLC function 18
G11.31 UFInp1=0
PLC input value 1
US.31 Use registers G11.31 to G11.60 (US.31-60 to set 30 void parameters.
-9999 to 9999 Use when constant (Const) parameter input is needed in the user function NO
G11.32 UFInp2=0 block.
PLC input value 2
US.32

G11.60 UFInp30=0
PLC input value 30 -9999 to 9999 See G11.31 (US.31). NO
US.60
G11.80 InV1=0.000 Analogue input V1
0 to 12.000% Allows setting the analog input V1 voltage value. NO
US.80 value
G11.81 InI2=+0.000 Analogue input I2 -12.000 to
Allows setting the analog input I2 voltage or current values. NO
US.81 value 12.000%
G11.82 DIValue=0
Digital inputs value 0 to 127 Allows setting the digital inputs voltage value. NO
US.82
G11.85 AOVal=0.000 Analogue output 0.000 to
Allows setting the analog output AO voltage or current values. NO
US.85 value 10.000%
G11.88 DOValue=0 Digital output
0 to 3 Allows setting the digital output Q1 voltage value. NO
US.88 value

64 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

5.13. Group 12 G12: PLC Function UF


This group appears when G8.2 (AP.2) is set to 1 (Yes) or G7.95 is set to 2 (P2P Master).

Set user defined functions for the 18 function blocks. If the function block setting is invalid, the output of
the User Output is -1. All outputs are read only, and can be used with the user output link of the G11 (US
in the integrated display) group.

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
Choose the function to perform in the function block, according to the
following table:
OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
0 NOP No operation
1 ADD Addition, (A + B) + C
2 SUB Substraction, (A B) C
Addition and substraction compound,
3 ADDSUB
(A + B) C
Smallest value of the input values,
4 MIN
MIN(A, B, C).
Largest value of the input values,
5 MAX
MAX(A, B, C).
6 ABS Absolute value of the A parameter, | A |
7 NEGATE Negative value of the A parameter, -( A ).
Compound multiplication and division,
8 MPYDIV
(A x B)/C.
9 REMAINDER Remainder operation of A and B, A % B
Comparison operation: if (A > B) the output is
C; if (A </=B) the output is 0. If C is not
10 COMPARE-GT
configured (default value 0x0000), the output
when the condition is satisfied is 1.
Comparison operation; if (A >/= B) output is C;
if (A<B) the output is 0.
11 COMPARE-GEQ
If C is not configured (default value 0x0000),
the output when the condition is satisfied is 1.
Comparison operation, if (A == B) then the
COMPARE- output is C. Otherwise, the output is 0.
12 EQUAL If C is not configured (default value 0x0000),
the output when the condition is satisfied is 1.
G12.1 Func1=NOP PLC function 1 0 to 28 NO
Comparison operation, if (A != B) then the
COMPARE- output is C. Otherwise, the output is 0.
13 NEQUAL If C is not configured (default value 0x0000),
the output when the condition is satisfied is 1.
Adds 1 each time a user sequence completes
a loop.
A sets the timer value.
B enables or disables the timer. If B = 0, the
timer is enabled.
14 TIMER
C defines the timer operation mode. If C = 0,
the output will be 1 when timer value equals A.
if C = 1, the output is the timer current value.
When A equals the timer value, the counter is
reset.
Sets a limit for the A parameter.
If input to A is between B and C, output the
15 LIMIT input to A. If input to A is larger than B, output
B. If input of A is smaller than C, output C.
B must be greater than or equal to C.
Outputs the result of the AND operation, (A
16 AND
and B) and C.
Outputs the result of the OR operation,
17 OR
(A | B) | C.
Outputs the result of the XOR operation,
18 XOR
(A ^ B) ^ C.

Note: Continues in the next page.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 65


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display

Note: Comes from the previous page.

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


Outputs the result of the AND/OR operation,
19 ANDOR
(A andB) | C.
Output a value after selecting one of two inputs, if
(A) then B, otherwise C.
20 SWITCH
If the input at A is 1, the output will be B. If the input
at A is 0, the output parameter will be C.
Test the B bit of the A parameter, BITTEST(A, B).
If the B bit of the A input is 1, the output is 1. If it is
0, then the output is 0.
21 BITTEST
The input value of B must be between 016. If the
value is higher than 16, it will be recognized as 16.
If input at B is 0, the output is always 0.
Set the B bit of the A parameter, BITSET(A, B).
Output the changed value after setting the B bit to
input at A.
22 BITSET
The input value of B must be between 016. If the
value is higher than 16, it will be recognized as 16.
If the input at B is 0, the output is always 0.
Clear the B bit of the A parameter, BITCLEAR(A,
B). Output the changed value after clearing the B
bit to input at A.
23 BITCLEAR
The input value of B must be between 016. If the
value is higher than 16, it will be recognized as 16.
If the input at B is 0, the output is always 0.
Output the input at A as the B filter gains time
constant, B x G11.2.
UF.1 24 LOWPASSFILTER In the above formula, set the time when the output
of A reaches 63.3% C stands for the filter
operation. If it is 0, the operation is started.
P, I gain = A, B parameter input, then output as C.
Conditions for PI_PROCESS output:
C = 0: Const PI,
C = 1: PI_PROCESS-B >= PI_PROCESS-OUT >= 0,
25 PI_CONTORL
C = 2: PI_PROCESS-B >= PI_PROCESS-OUT >= -
(PI_PROCESS-B),
P gain = A/100, I gain = 1/(Bx Loop Time),
If there is an error with PI settings, output is -1.
A is an input error, B is an output limit, C is the
26 PI_PROCESS value of Const PI output.
Range of C is 0 to 32767.
Upcounts the pulses and then output the value
UPCOUNT(A, B, C).
After receiving a trigger input (A), outputs are
upcounted by C conditions. If the B inputs is 1,
do not operate and display 0. If the B inputs is 0,
27 UPCOUNT operate.
If C is 0, upcount when A changes from 0 to 1.
If C is 1, upcount when A is changed from 1 to 0.
If C is 2, upcount whenever the input at A
changes.
Output range is: 0 to 32767.
Downcounts the pulses and then output the value-
DOWNCOUNT(A, B, C).
After receiving a trigger input (A), outputs are
28 DOWNCOUNT downcounted by C conditions. If the B input is 1, do
not operate and display the initial value of C. If the
B input is 0, operate. Downcounts when the A
parameter changes from 0 to 1.

G12.2 Inpt1A=0 Input A for PLC


0 to 65535 Communication address of the first input parameter of the PLC function. NO
UF.2 function 1
G12.3 Inpt1B=0 Input B for PLC
0 to 65535 Communication address of the second input parameter of the PLC function. NO
UF.3 function 1
G12.4 Inpt1C=0 Input C for PLC
0 to 65535 Communication address of the third input parameter of the PLC function. NO
UF.4 function 1
G12.5 Outp1=+0 Output PLC -32767 to
Output value (Read Only) after performing the function block. NO
UF.5 function 1 32767

66 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable
display Name / Set on
Range Function
Description RUN
Integrated display
G12.6 Func2=NOP
PLC function 2 See G12.1 See G12.1 (UF.1) NO
UF.6
G12.7 Inpt2A=0 Input A for PLC
See G12.2 See G12.2 (UF.2) NO
UF.7 function 2
G12.8 Inpt2B=0 Input B for PLC
See G12.3 See G12.3 (UF.3) NO
UF.8 function 2
G12.9 Inpt2C=0 Input C for PLC
See G12.4 See G12.4 (UF.4) NO
UF.9 function 2
G12.10 Outp2=+0 Output PLC
See G12.5 See G12.5 (UF.5) NO
UF.10 function 2


G12.86 Func18=NOP
PLC function 18 See G12.1 See G12.1 (UF.1) NO
UF.86
G12.87 Inpt18A=0 Input A for PLC
See G12.2 See G12.2 (UF.2) NO
UF.87 function 18
G12.88 Inpt18B=0 Input B for PLC
See G12.3 See G12.3 (UF.3) NO
UF.88 function 18
G12.89 Inpt18C=0 Input C for PLC
See G12.4 See G12.4 (UF.4) NO
UF.89 function 18
G12.90 Outp18=+0 Output PLC
See G12.5 See G12.5 (UF.5) NO
UF.90 function 18

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 67


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

5.14. Group 13 G13: Fault History


This group is only shown in the removable LCD display.

For the integrated display, faults are shown in parameters Pr.90 to Pr9.96.

Removable Set
display Name /
Range Function on
Description
Integrated display RUN
This screen will be automatically displayed every time the drive trips with
a new fault.
Shows the current fault status of the drive. In case there is no fault the
screen will display the message No Fault. By pressing the * key the fault
number will be displayed.
The drive resets pressing the display STOP-RESET key or using an
external reset when available. Faults can be automatically reset using the
Auto Reset function.

The following table shows all of the possible faults:


COD FAULT COD FAULT
0 No Fault 22 Param_Wr_Err
1 OverLoad 23 Pipe Fill Flt
2 UnderLoad 24 IO Board Fail
3 Inv OverLoad 25 External Brake
G13.1 /Current 4 E-Thermal 26 No Motor
Fault = No Fault Fault status - 5 Ground Fault 27 Slot 1 Fail -
visualization 6 Output Ph Loss 28 Slot 2 Fail
7 Input Ph Loss 29 Slot 3 Fail
8 OverSpeed 30 STO Fault
10 NTC 33 Free Run
11 OverCurrent 34 Low Voltage
12 OverVoltage 35 Lost Command
13 External Trip 36 KeypadLostCMD
14 Arm Short 49 ADC Error
15 OverHeat 50 EEPROM Error
16 Fuse Open 51 Watchdog-1 Err
17 MC Fail 52 Watchdog-2 Err
18 Encoder Error
19 PTC
20 FAN Trip
Note: For further information about faults see section 3, Warning & Fault
Messages.

The first group (FAULT INFO 1) shows the information of the last fault and
G13.2 / Fault will be used as the first fault history register.
FAULT 1 INFO [40] - -
History Register 1
The last five faults, listed in chronological order, are shown as new faults
occur, with the most recent fault in the first place (FAULT INFO 1). Every
time a fault is produced, the drive shows the (FAULT INFO 1) screen,
moving the previous fault to the next register position (FAULT INFO 2).
The rest of stored faults will move down a position. The oldest fault
G13.3 / Fault
FAULT 2 INFO [40] - message (FAULT INFO 5) will be lost. -
History Register 2
These groups enable accessing to the extended information of each of the
last five faults registers. This information displays the drive status in the
moment the fault has been produced.
OPT. FUNCTION
G13.4 / Fault
FAULT 3 INFO [40] - X Fault= Fault register X display -
History Register 3
X Op Fq= Output frequency value when fault occurred.
X Out I= Output current value when fault occurred
X DC Volt= Bus voltage value when fault occurred
X Temp= Equipments temperature when fault occurred.
X DI= Digital inputs status values when fault occurred.
G13.5 / Fault
FAULT 4 INFO [40] - X DO Sta= Digital outputs status values when fault occurred -
History Register 4
Number of days the drive had been turned on when the
X On Days=
fault occurred.
Number of minutes the drive had been turned on when
X On Min=
the fault occurred.
Number of days the drive had been turned on when the
G13.6 / Fault X RUN Days=
FAULT 5 INFO [40] - fault occurred. -
History Register 5
Number of minutes the drive had been turned on when
X RUN Min=
the fault occurred.

[40] These groups will be displayed as new faults occur

68 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS


POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Removable Set
display Name /
Range Function on
Description
Integrated display RUN
OPT. FUNCTION
NO Function disabled.
G13.7 / Clear Fault NO Deletes the fault history (the last five faults). The screen will
Clr FaultHist= N NO
History YES YES return to the default value NO once all of the faults have been
deleted.

In order to select if Low Voltage fault must be saved in the fault history
register or not.

OPT. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION


G13.8 / Low
ENB/DIS LV Flt= D D The Low Voltage fault will not be saved in the
Voltage fault D DISABLED NO
E fault history.
register
The Low Voltage fault will be saved in the
E ENABLED
fault history.
Note: If the drive losses power completely before displaying the fault, the
Low Voltage fault will not be saved despite having enabled this parameter.

DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS 69


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

6. MODBUS COMMUNICATION
To control the variable speed drive with a PLC or a computer. the industrial standard communications
protocol of Modicon, Modbus, is used. Connect the communication cables (*) and set the communication
parameters on the drive according to the guidelines within this section.

6.1. Introduction
Various drives, or other slave devices, can be connected in a RS485 network to be controlled by a PLC or
computer. This way, parameter setting and monitoring can be done from a computer, via a user program.
To communicate, any kind of RS485 converter can be used. Specifications depend on the manufacturer.

Figure 6.1 RS485 network system configuration

The purpose of the Serial Communication Network of the SD300 is to integrate the drive into a network
compatible with the Modbus communications protocol. This is possible using the RS485 physical
communications port or USB port.
Modbus communication system allows SD300 drives to be controlled and/or monitored as a slave by a
Modbus master from a remote location.
RS485 network allows connecting up to 16 equipments in the same network.
SD300 drives operate as a peripheral slave when connected to Modbus system. This means that the drive
does not start the communication task, the master does.
Practically all of the operating modes, parameters and drive characteristics are accessible through serial
communications. For example, master can give start and stop order to the drive, control SD300 status,
read the current used by the motor etc., in short, the master can access all of the features of the drive.

(*) For detailed instructions on how to make the connections, please refer to the Hardware and Installation Manual

70 MODBUS COMMUNICATION
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

6.2. Supported Modbus Function Codes


Serial communications protocol provided by SD300 drive adhere to Modbus. The drive uses reading and
writing functions between all of the functions that exist in Modbus protocol. The used functions by the drive
are the following ones:

Function Description
3 Registers Reading
4 Read Input Register
6 Write Single Register
16 Registers Writing

The implementation of this function code in the drive allows reading up to 120 registers into a Parameters
Group in a frame. If you want to access to a consecutive memory registers. but belonging to different
groups. you should access in so many frames as groups are involved.

6.2.1. Modbus Function Code N 3: Registers Reading


This function code allows the Modbus controller (master) to read the content of the data registers
indicated in the drive (slave). This function code only admits unicast addressing. Broadcast or
groupcast addressing are not possible with this function code.

The implementation of this function code in the drive allows reading up to 120 registers with
consecutive addresses of the drive in a single frame.

Next. a frame is shown where the master tries to read the content of 3 registers of a drive where
the current used by each phase is. The information that should be attached in the ask frame is the
following:

Data address of the drive.


Modbus function code (3 Registers reading).
Starting Data address.
Registers number for reading.
CRC-16 code.

The answer of the drive (slave) should contain the following fields:

Data address of the slave.


Modbus function code (3 Registers reading).
Bytes number for reading.
Bytes number / 2 registers.
CRC-16 code.

Each register consists of 2 bytes (2x8bits=16 bits). This is the default length for all registers.

Example:
Suppose that we want to read the motor current (nameplate data) via communications. This data
corresponds to the parameter G2.13 MTR CUR=0.0A. The frame that should be transmitted is:

Modbus Modbus Function Starting Data


Registers Number CRC-16
Address Code Address (44622)
0x0A 0x03 0x0120D 0x0001 0x2493

Suppose that instantaneous current of the equipment is 8.2 A. (Modbus value 82 decimal = 0x52
Hexadecimal). The answer of the slave will be:

Modbus Modbus Function Data (address 20)


Bytes Number CRC-16
Address Code (=110)
0x0A 0x03 0x02 0x0052 0x9C78

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 71
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

6.2.2. Modbus Function Code N 16: Registers Writing


This function code allows the Modbus controller (master) to write the content of the data registers
indicated in the drive (slave). whenever those registers are not of Read only. Registers writing by
the master does not impede the later modification of those registers by the slave.
The implementation of this function code in the drive allows writing up to 5 registers of the drive in
a single frame.

Next. a frame is shown where the master tries to write the content of 1 register that stores the
acceleration time. The information that should be attached in the ask frame is the following one:

Data address of the slave.


Modbus function code (16 Registers writing).
Starting Data Address.
Registers number for writing.
Bytes number for writing.
Content of registers for writing.
CRC-16 code.

The answer of the slaves includes:

Data address of the slave.


Modbus function code (16 Registers writing).
Starting Data Address.
Written registers number.
CRC-16 code.

6.3. Addressing Modes


6.3.1. Broadcast Addressing Mode
Broadcast addressing mode allows the master to access at the same time to all of the slaves
connected to the Modbus network. The Modbus function code that admits this global addressing
mode is:

Function Description
16 Registers Writing

In order to access to all of the equipments connected in a Modbus network. you must use the
address 0.
When this address is used. all of the slaves in the Modbus network make the required task but they
do not prepare any answer.

72 MODBUS COMMUNICATION
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

6.4. Summary of Modbus Addresses


6.4.1. Common Area
Modbus Address
Parameter Scale Units R/W Data Values
Decimal Hexadecimal
40000 0h0000 Inverter Model - - R B: SD300
0: 0.75kW
1: 1.5kW
2: 2.2kW
3: 3.7kW
4: 5.5kW
40001 0h0001 Drive Power Rating - - R
5: 7.5kW
6: 11kW
7: 15kW
8: 18.5kW
9: 22kW
0: 220VAC
40002 0h0002 Drive Input Voltage - - R
1: 400VAC
(Ex) 0x0100: Version 1.0
40003 0h0003 SW Version - - R
(Ex) 0x0101: Version 1.1
40005 0h0005 Reference Frequency 0.01 Hz R/W Starting Frequency to Max Frequency
Bit 0: Stop
Bit 1: Forward Start
R/W Bit 2: Reverse Start
Bit 3: Fault Reset
Bit 4: Emergency Stop
- Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6 8: Setpoint Introduction
0: Local
1: Start/Stop-1
2: Start/Stop-2
3: RS485 integrated
4: Communications Option
5: PLC Option
Bit 9 14: Reference Frequency
0: Local Reference
1: Not used
2: Step frequency 1
3: Step frequency 2
4: Step frequency 3
5: Step frequency 4
6: Step frequency 5
7: Step frequency 6
40006 0h0006 Start / Stop Command - - 8: Step frequency 7
9: Step frequency 8
10: Step frequency 9
11: Step frequency 10
R
12: Step frequency 11
13: Step frequency 12
14: Step frequency 13
15: Step frequency 14
16: Step frequency 15
17: Up Speed
18: Down Speed
19: Constant
20 21: Reserved
22: Analog V1
23: Analog I1
24: Analog V2
25: Analog I2
26: Reserved
27: RS485
28: Communication Option
29: PLC Option
30: Fix Frequency
31: PID
Bit 15: Not used
40007 0h0007 Acceleration Time 0.1 Sec R/W
40008 0h0008 Deceleration Time 0.1 Sec R/W
40009 0h0009 Output Current 0.1 A R
40010 0h000A Output Frequency 0.01 Hz R
40011 0h000B Output Voltage 1 V R
40012 0h000C DC Bus Voltage 1 V R

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 73
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Modbus Address
Parameter Scale Units R/W Data Values
Decimal Hexadecimal
40013 0h000D Output Power 0.1 kW R
Bit 0: Stop
Bit 1: Start (+)
Bit 2: Start (-)
Bit 3: Fault
Bit 4: Accelerating
Bit 5: Decelerating
Bit 6: Steady Status
Bit 7: DC Brake
40014 0h000E Drive Status - - R Bit 8: Stop
Bit 9: Fix Frequency
Bit 10: Open Brake
Bit 11: Start (+) Command
Bit 12: Start (-) Command
Bit 13: Start / Stop by Communication
Bit 14: Freq. Reference by
Communication
Bit 15: 0-Remote; 1-Local
Bit 0: Latch type fault
40015 0h000F Fault information - - R Bit 3: Level type fault
Bit 10: Hardware diagnosis
Bit 0: P1
Bit 1: P2
Bit 2: P3
Bit 3: P4
40016 0h0010 Digital Inputs Status - - R
Bit 4: P5
Bit 5: P6
Bit 6: P7
Bit 7: P8
Bit 0: Relay 1
40017 0h0011 Digital Outputs Status - - R
Bit 1: Multifunction output
40018 0h0012 V1 0.1 % R Voltage input V1
40019 0h0013 V2 0.1 % R Voltage Input V2 (Option I/O)
40020 0h0014 I2 0.1 % R Current Input I2
40021 0h0015 RPM 1 rpm R Speed Output
0: Hz
40026 0h001A Display unit - - R
1: rpm
40027 0h001B Number of poles - - R Motor poles visualization

Notes:

1. Start / Stop order through communications (address 40006/0h0006)


Every bit is enabled when they change their status from 0 to 1. For example, the drive stops due to a fault
during start. Until the fault has been reset and the start order is given, the drive will not operate.

2. Addresses 40005/0h0005 and 40006/0h0006


The values stored in these addresses will be deleted if the drive losses it power supply. These addresses
will only keep their values while the equipment remains powered.

6.4.2. Monitoring Parameters


NOTE: These are read-only parameters

Modbus Address
Parameter Scale Units Values
Decimal Hexadecimal
40768 0h0300 Drive model - - SD300: 006h
0.75kW: 3200h
1.5 kW: 4015h
2.2 kW: 4022h
3.7 kW: 4037h
5.5 kW: 4055h
40769 0h0301 Rated power - -
7.5 kW: 4075h
11 kW: 40B0h
15 kW: 40F0h
18.5 kW: 4125h
22 kW: 4160h
220VAC: 0221h
40770 0h0302 Input voltage - -
400VAC: 0431h
40771 0h0303 SW Version - - (Ex) 0x0100: Version 1.0 (Ex) 0x0101: Version 1.1

74 MODBUS COMMUNICATION
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Modbus Address
Parameter Scale Units Values
Decimal Hexadecimal
Bit 0 3:
0: Stopped
1: Operating in forward direction
2: Operating in reverse direction
3: DC operating (0 speed control)
Bit 4 7
1: Speed searching
2: Accelerating
3: Operating at constant rate
40773 0h0305 Drive operation state - - 4: Decelerating
5: Decelerating to stop
6: H/W OCS
7: S/W OCS
8: Dwell operation
Bit 12 15
0: Normal state
4: A warning has occurred
8: A fault has occurred. Drive will operate according
to the setting of Pr.30.
Bit 0 7: Frequency command source
0: Keypad speed
1: Keypad torque
2-4: Up/Down operation speed
5: V1, 7: V2, 8: I2, 9: Pulse
10: Built-in RS 485
11: Optional communication card
12: PLC
Drive operation frequency command
40774 0h0306 - - 13: Jog
source
14: PID
25-39: Multi-step speed frequency
Bit 8 15: Operation command source
0: Keypad
1: Optional communication card
2: PLC
3: Built-in RS 485
4: Terminal block
40775 0h0307 SW Version - - (Ex) 0x0100: Version 1.0
40776 0h0308 SW Version - - (Ex) 0x0101: Version 1.1
40784 0h0310 Output current 0.1 A -
40785 0h0311 Output frequency 0.01 Hz -
40786 0h0312 Output rpm 0 rpm -
40787 0h0313 Motor speed feedback 0 rpm -32768 rpm 32767 rpm (directional)
40788 0h0314 Output voltage 1 V -
40789 0h0315 DC bus voltage 1 V -
40790 0h0316 Output power 0.1 kW -
40791 0h0317 Output torque 0.1 % -
40792 0h0318 PID reference 0.1 % -
40793 0h0319 PID feedback 0.1 % -
40794 0h031A Motor 1 poles number - - Visualization of motor 1 poles
40795 0h031B Motor 2 poles number - - Visualization of motor 2 poles
40796 0h031C Poles number of the selected motor - - Visualization of selected motor poles
40797 0h031D Select Hz/rpm - - 0: Hz, 1: rpm
Bit 0: P1
Bit 1: P2
Bit 2: P3
40800 0h0320 Digital inputs information Bit 3: P4
Bit 4: P5
Bit 5: P6
Bit 6: P7
Bit 0: Relay 1
40801 0h0321 Digital outputs information - -
Bit 1: Multi function output
Bit 0: Input 1 (CM.70)
Bit 1: Input 2 (CM.71)
Bit 2: Input 3 (CM.72)
Communication addresses Bit 3: Input 4 (CM.73)
40802 0h0322 - -
information Bit 4: Input 5 (CM.74)
Bit 5: Input 6 (CM.75)
Bit 6: Input 7 (CM.76)
Bit 7: Input 8 (CM.77)
0: Motor 1
40803 0h0323 Selected motor - -
1: Motor 2
40804 0h0324 V1 0.1 % Analog voltage input V1
40805 0h0325 V2 0.1 % Analog voltage input V2

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 75
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Modbus Address
Parameter Scale Units Values
Decimal Hexadecimal
40806 0h0326 I2 0.1 % Analog current input I2
40807 0h0327 AO1 0.1 % Analog output 1
40808 0h0328 AO2 0.1 % Analog output 2
40813 0h032D Drive temperature 1 C -
40814 0h032E Drive power consumption 1 kWh -
40815 0h032F Drive power consumption 1 kWh
Bit 0: Overload
Bit 1: Underload
Bit 2: Inverter Overload
Bit 3: E-Thermal
Bit 4: Ground Fault
Bit 5: Output open-phase
Bit 6: Input open-phase
40816 0h0330 Latch type trip 1 information - -
Bit 9: NTC
Bit 10: Overcurrent
Bit 11: Overvoltage
Bit 12: External trip
Bit 13: Arm short
Bit 14: Over Heat
Bit 15: Open fuse
Bit 0: MC Fail trip
Bit 2: PTC trip
Bit 3: Fan trip
Bit 5: Error while writing parameter
40817 0h0331 Latch type trip 2 information - - Bit 6: Pre PID trip
Bit 7: External card contact fault
Bit 8: External brake trip
Bit 9: No motor trip
Bit 10: External card fault
Bit 0: Free run fault
Bit 1: Low voltage
Bit 2: Lost command
40818 0h0332 Level type trip information - -
Bit 3: Display lost command
Bit 4: Safety A
Bit 5: Safety B
Bit 0: ADC error
Bit 1: EEPROM error
40819 0h0333 HW diagnosis trip information - - Bit 2: Watchdog1
Bit 3: Watchdog 2
Bit 5: Full queue
Bit 0: Overload
Bit 1: Underload
Bit 2: Drive overload
Bit 3: Lost command
Bit 4: Fan running
40820 0h0334 Warning information - -
Bit 5: DB
Bit 6: Wrong encoder installation
Bit 7: Encoder disconnection
Bit 8: Keypad lost
Bit 9: Auto tuning failed
Total number of days the drive has been powered
40832 0h0340 Days ON 0 Das
on.
Total number of minutes the drive has been powered
40833 0h0341 Minutes ON 0 Minutos
on, excluding the total number of days.
Total number of days the drive has been driving the
40834 0h0342 Days on run 0 Das
motor.
Total number of minutes the drive has been driving
40835 0h0343 Minutes on run 0 Minutos
the motor, excluding the total number of days.
Total number of days the heat sink fan has been
40836 0h0344 Fan runtime days 0 Das
running.
Total number of minutes the heat sink fan has been
40837 0h0345 Fan runtime minutes 0 Minutos
running, excluding the total number of days.
0: None
40842 0h034A Optional card - -
9: CANopen

76 MODBUS COMMUNICATION
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

6.4.3. Control Parameters


NOTE: These parameters are read and write.

Modbus Address
Parameter Scale Units Values
Decimal Hexadecimal
40896 0h0380 Frequency command 0.01 Hz Frequency command setting
40897 0h0381 Rpm command 1 rpm Rpm command setting
Bit 0
0: Stop command
1: Run command
Bit 1
40898 0h0382 Operation command - - 0: Reverse command
1: Forward command
Bit 2: 0 1: Trip initialization
Bit 3: 0 1: Free-run stop
40899 0h0383 Acceleration time 0.1 s Acceleration time setting
40900 0h0384 Deceleration time 0.1 s Deceleration time setting
Bit 0: Input 1 (CM.70)
Bit 1: Input 2 (CM.71)
Bit 2: Input 3 (CM.72)
Communications addresses control Bit 3: Input 4 (CM.73)
40901 0h0385
(0: Off, 1: On) Bit 4: Input 5 (CM.74)
Bit 5: Input 6 (CM.75)
Bit 6: Input 7 (CM.76)
Bit 7: Input 8 (CM.77)
Digital outputs control Bit 0: Relay 1
40902 0h0386
(0: Off, 1: On) Bit 1: Multi function output
40904 0h0388 PID reference 0.1 % PID reference command
40905 0h0389 PID feedback 0.1 % PID feedback value
40906 0h038A Motor rated current 0.1 A -
40907 0h038B Motor rated voltage 1 V -
40912 0h0390 Torque reference 0.1 % Torque command
40913 0h0391 Torque limit positive forward 0.1 % Torque limit in forward direction
40914 0h0392 Torque limit negative forward 0.1 % Regenerative torque limit in forward direction
40915 0h0393 Torque limit positive reverse 0.1 % Torque limit in reverse direction
40916 0h0394 Torque limit negative reverse 0.1 % Regenerative torque limit in reverse direction
40917 0h0395 Torque bias 0.1 % Torque bias

6.4.4. Memory Control Area


NOTE: These parameters are read and write.

Modbus Address Set on


Parameter Scale Units Modbus Address
Decimal Hexadecimal run
40992 0h03E0 Save parameters - - YES 0: No, 1: YES
40993 0h03E1 Monitor mode initialization - - NO 0: No, 1: YES
0: No, 1: Todos.
By groups:
2: Operation, 3: bA, 4: Ad, 5: Cn, 6: In,
40994 0h03E2 Initialize parameters - - YES
7: OU, 8: CM, 9: AP, 12: Pr, 13: M2.
Note: Setting is prohibited during fault
trip interruptions.
40995 0h03E3 Display changed parameters - - NO 0: No, 1: YES
40997 0h03E5 Delete fault history - NO 0: No, 1: YES
40998 0h03E6 Delete user registered codes - NO 0: No, 1: YES
Write: 0-9999
40999 0h03E7 Hide parameter mode 0 Hex NO
Read: 0: Unlock, 1: Lock
Write: 0-9999
41000 0h03E8 Lock parameter mode 0 Hex NO
Read: 0: Unlock, 1: Lock
41001 0h03E9 Easy parameter setup - - NO 0: No, 1: YES
41002 0h03EA Initialize power consumption - - NO 0: No, 1: YES
41003 0h03EB Initialize operation accumulative time - - NO 0: No, 1: YES
Initialize fan operation accumulative
41004 0h03EC - - NO 0: No, 1: YES
time

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 77
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

6.4.5. Programming Parameters


Modbus Address
Parameter Screen Description Range Modbus Range
Decimal Hexadecimal
[G1.19] to [G1.20] [G1.19] to [G1.20]
G1.1 / 0.00 1 LCLSP=0.00Hz Local speed 44353 0h1101
(dr.19 to dr.20) (dr.19 to dr.20)
G1.2 / dr.2 2 LclTQ=0.0% Local torque 44354 0h1102 -180.0 to 180.0% -1800 to 1800
G1.3 / ACC 3 ACC1=20.0s Acceleration Ramp 44355 0h1103 0.0 to 600.0s 0 to 6000
G1.4 / dEC 4 DECEL1=30.0s Deceleration Ramp 44356 0h1104 0.0 to 600.0s 0 to 6000
LOCAL 0
REMOTE 1
6 CONTROL REMOTE2 3
G1.6 / dru Control mode 1 44358 0h1106
MODE1=REMOTE MODBUS 4
COMMS 5
PLC 6
LOCAL 0
V1 2
V2 4
I2 5
G1.7 / Frq 7 REF1 SP= LOCAL Speed reference 1 44359 0h1107
MDBUS 6
COMMS 8
PLC 9
PULSE 12
LOCAL 0
V1 2
V2 4
I2 5
G1.8 / dr.8 8 REF1 TQ= LOCAL Torque reference 1 44360 0h1108
MDBUS 6
COMMS 8
PLC 9
PULSE 12
V/Hz 0
G1.9 / dr. 9 Ctr.T=V/Hz Control type 44361 0h1109 SlipCom 2
S-less1 4
G1.10 / dr.10 10 Torq CTRL=N Torque control 44362 0h110A N/Y 0/1
[G1.19] to [G1.20] [G1.19] to [G1.20]
G1.11 / dr.11 11 InchF=10.00Hz Inch Frequency 44363 0h110B
(dr.19 to dr.20) (dr.19 to dr.20)
G1.12 / dr.12 12 InchAcT=20.0s INCH acceleration time 44364 0h110C 0.0 to 600.0s 0 to 6000
G1.13 / dr.13 13 InchDeT=30.0s INCH deceleration time 44365 0h110D 0.0 to 600.0s 0 to 6000
0.2 kW 0
0.4 kW 1
0.75 kW 2
1.1 kW 3
1.5 kW 4
2.2 kW 5
3.0 kW 6
3.7 kW 7
G1.14 / dr.14 14 MTRPWR= (*) Motor power 44366 0h110E
4.0 kW 8
5.5 kW 9
7.5 kW 10
11.0 kW 11
15.0 kW 12
18.5 kW 13
22.0 kW 14
30.0 kW 15
Manual 0
G1.15 / dr.15 15 TqBoost=Manual Torque boost 44367 0h110F Auto1 1
Auto2 2
G1.16 / dr.16 16 FWBoost=2.0% Start torque in forward direction 44368 0h1110 0.0 to 15.0% 0 to 150
G1.17 / dr.17 17 RVBoost=2.0% Start torque in reverse direction. 44369 0h1111 0.0 to 15.0% 0 to 150
G1.18 / dr.18 18MTRFRQ=60.00Hz Motor frequency 44370 0h1112 30.00 to 400.00Hz 3000 to 40000
G1.19 / dr.19 19 STRFRQ=0.5Hz Start frequency 44371 0h1113 0.01 to 10.00Hz 1 to 1000
G1.20 / dr.20 20 MxSpL=60.00Hz Max speed limit 44372 0h1114 40.00 to 400.00Hz 4000 to 40000
Hz 0
G1.21 21 Hz/Rpm=Hz Hz/Rpm Display 44373 0h1115
Rpm 1

(*) This value depends on the motor setting.

78 MODBUS COMMUNICATION
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Modbus Address
Parameter Screen Description Range Modbus Range
Decimal Hexadecimal
Run Freq. 0
Accel. Time 1
Decel. Time 2
Cmd Source 3
Ref. Source 4
MultiStep 1 5
MultiStep 2 6
MultiStep 3 7
Oupt. Curr. 8
1.80 / dr.80 80 SelRngEnt=Run Freq Select ranges at power input 44432 0h1150
Motor RPM 9
DC Voltage 10
User Sel. 1 11
Out of Order 12
Sel. Run Dir. 13
Oupt. Curr. 2 14
Motor2 RPM 15
DC Voltage2 16
User Sel. 2 17
Volt V 0
G1.81 / dr.81 81 SelCod=Volt V Select monitor code 44433 0h1151 Pow kW 1
Tq kgf 2
All 0
G1.89 / dr.89 89 DspChng=All Display changed parameters 40995 0h3E3
Chang 1
Mov. In. Pos. 0
90 ESC Func= Mov. In.
G1.90 / dr.90 ESC key function 44442 0h115A JOG Key 1
Pos.
Local/Rem. 2
None 0
G1.91 91 Eloader=None Eloader function 44443 0h115B Download 1
Upload 2
No 0
All 1
dr 2
bA 3
Ad 4
Cn 5
G1.93 / dr.93 93 INITIALIS=No Parameter initialization 44445 0h115D In 6
OU 7
CM 8
AP 9
Pr 12
M2 13
run 16
G1.94 / dr.94 94 PswRg=0 Register password 44446 0h115E 0 to 9999 0 to 9999
G1.95 / dr.95 95 PrmLock=0 Lock password 44447 0h115F 0 to 9999 0 to 9999
G1.97 / dr.97 97 SoftVer=0 Software version 44449 0h1161 0 to 9999 0 to 9999
G1.98 / dr.98 98 IOSwVer=0 IO Software version 44450 0h1162 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G1.99 / dr.99 99 IOHwVer=0 Hardware version 44451 0h1163 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
None 0
V1 1
G2.1 / bA.1 1 REF2 SP=None Alt Speed Ref 44609 0h1201 V2 3
I2 4
Pulse 6
M+(G*A) 0
Mx (G*A) 1
M/(G*A) 2
M+[M*(G*A)] 3
G2.2 / bA.2 2 AuxCalcType=M+(G*A) Aux Calc Type 44610 0h1202
M+G*2(A-50%) 4
Mx[G*2(A-50%) 5
M/[G*2(A-50%)] 6
M+M*G*2(A-50%) 7
G2.3 / bA.3 3 AuxRfG=100.0% Aux. Ref. Gain 44611 0h1203 -200.0 to 200.0 -2000 to 2000
LOCAL 0
REMOTE 1
4 CONTROL REMOTE2 3
G2.4 / bA.4 Alt Ctrl Mode 44612 0h1204
MODE2=REMOTE MODBUS 4
COMMS 5
PLC 6

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 79
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Modbus Address
Parameter Screen Description Range Modbus Range
Decimal Hexadecimal
LOCAL 0
V1 2
G2.5 / bA.5 5 REF2 SP=LOCAL Alt Speed Ref 44613 0h1205
V2 3
I2 4
MDBUS 6
COMMS 8
G2.6 / bA.6 6 REF2 TQ= LOCAL Torque Ref2 44614 0h1206
PLC 9
PULSE 12
Linear 0
Square 1
G2.7 / bA.7 7 V/FPn=Linear V/F Pattern 44615 0h1207
V/F Us 2
Square2 3
MaxFreq 0
G2.8 / bA.8 8 RmpT= MaxFreq Ramp T Mode 44616 0h1208
DeltaFreq 1
0.01s 0
G2.9 / bA.9 9 TimScl=0.1s Time scale 44617 0h1209 0.1s 1
1s 2
60Hz 0
G2.10 / bA.10 10 I/P Freq=60Hz Input Frequency 44618 0h120A
50Hz 1
G2.11 / bA.11 11 POLE Numbr=4 POLE Number 44619 0h120B 2 to 48 2 to 48
G2.12 / bA.12 12 RtSlp=40rpm Rated Slip 44620 0h120C 0 to 3000rpm 0 to 3000
G2.13 / bA.13 13 MTRCUR=3.6A Motor Current 44621 0h120D 1.0 to 200.0A 10 to 2000
G2.14 / bA.14 14 NOLODC=1.6A No load Current 44622 0h120E 0.5 to 200.0A 5 to 2000
G2.15 / bA.15 15 MTR VOLT=0V Motor Voltage 44623 0h120F 180 to 480V 180 to 480
G2.16 / bA.16 16 EFFICIEN=72% Efficiency 44624 0h1210 70 to 100% 70 to 100
G2.17 / bA.17 17 InertiaRate=0 Inertia Rate 44625 0h1211 0 to 8 0 to 8
G2.18 / bA.18 18 TrimPwr%=100% Trim Power % 44626 0h1212 70 to 130% 70 to 130
170 to 230V 170 to 230
G2.19 / bA.19 19 ACi/Volt=380V AC Input Volt 44627 0h1213
320 to 480V 320 to 480
None 0
All 1
G2.20 / bA.20 20 AutoTuning=None Auto tuning 44628 0h1214 Allst 2
Rs+Lsig 3
Tr 6
G2.21 / bA.21 21 Rs=0 Stator Resistor 44629 0h1215 0 to 9999
Depend on motor
G2.22 / bA.22 22 LSigma=0mH Leak Inductor 44630 0h1216 0 to 9999
settings
G2.23 / bA.23 23 Ls=0mH Stator Inductor 44631 0h1217 0 to 9999
G2.24 / bA.24 24 Tr=145ms Rotor Time Const 44632 0h1218 25 to 5000ms 25 to 5000
G2.25 / bA.25 25 Ls Scl=100% Stator Ind. Sca. 44633 0h1219 50 to 150% 50 to 150
G2.26 / bA.26 26 Tr Scl=100% Rotor Ti Co Sca. 44634 0h121A 50 to 150% 50 to 150
G2.31 / bA.31 31 LsR Scl=80% Regen. Ind. Scl. 44639 0h121F 70 to 100% 70 to 100
G2.41 / bA.41 41 UsFq1=15.00Hz User Frequency 1 44649 0h1229 0.00 to [G1.20]/dr.20 0.00 to [G1.20]/dr.20
G2.42 / bA.42 42 User V1=25% User Voltage 1 44650 0h122A 0 to 100% 0 to 100
G2.43 / bA.43 43 UsFq2=30.00Hz User Frequency 2 44651 0h122B 0.00 to [G1.20]/dr.20 0.00 to [G1.20]/dr.20
G2.44 / bA.44 44 User V2=50% User Voltage 2 44652 0h122C 0 to 100% 0 to 100
G2.45 / bA.45 45 UsFq3=45.00Hz User Frequency 3 44653 0h122D 0.00 to [G1.20]/dr.20 0.00 to [G1.20]/dr.20
G2.46 / bA.46 46 User I2=75% User Voltage 3 44654 0h122E 0 to 100% 0 to 100
G2.47 / bA.47 47 UsFrq4=0.00Hz User Frequency 4 44655 0h122F 0.00 to [G1.20]/dr.20 0.00 to [G1.20]/dr.20
G2.48 / bA.48 48 User V4=0% User Voltage 4 44656 0h1230 0 to 100% 0 to 100
G2.50 / St1 50 MREF1=10.00% Multi-Reference1 44658 0h1232
G2.51 / St2 51 MREF2=20.00% Multi-Reference2 44659 0h1233
G2.52 / St3 52 MREF3=30.00% Multi-Reference3 44660 0h1234
G2.53 / bA.53 53 MREF4=40.00% Multi-Reference4 44661 0h1235 0.00 to [G1.20]/dr.20 0.00 to [G1.20]/dr.20
G2.54 / bA.54 54 MREF5=50.00% Multi-Reference5 44662 0h1236
G2.55 / bA.55 55 MREF6=60.00% Multi-Reference6 44663 0h1237
G2.56 / bA.56 56 MREF7=60.00% Multi-Reference7 44664 0h1238
G2.70 / bA.70 70 ACC2=20.0s Acc Ramp 2 44678 0h1246
G2.71 / bA.71 71 DEC2=30.0s Decel Ramp 2 44679 0h1247
G2.72 / bA.72 72 ACC3=20.0s Acc Ramp 3 44680 0h1248
G2.73 / bA.73 73 DEC3=30.0s Decel Ramp 3 44681 0h1249
G2.74 / bA.74 74 ACC4=20.0s Acc Ramp 4 44682 0h124A
G2.75 / bA.75 75 DEC4=30.0s Decel Ramp 4 44683 0h124B
G2.76 / bA.76 76 ACC5=20.0s Acc Ramp 5 44684 0h124C
0.0 to 600.0s 0 to 6000
G2.77 / bA.77 77 DEC5=30.0s Decel Ramp 5 44685 0h124D
G2.78 / bA.78 78 ACC6=20.0s Acc Ramp 6 44686 0h124E
G2.79 / bA.79 79 DEC6=30.0s Decel Ramp 6 44687 0h124F
G2.80 / bA.80 80 ACC7=20.0s Acc Ramp 7 44688 0h1250
G2.81 / bA.81 81 DEC7=30.0s Decel Ramp 7 44689 0h1251
G2.82 / bA.82 82 ACC8=20.0s Acc Ramp 8 44690 0h1252
G2.83 / bA.83 83 DEC8=30.0s Decel Ramp 8 44691 0h1253

80 MODBUS COMMUNICATION
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Modbus Address
Parameter Screen Description Range Modbus Range
Decimal Hexadecimal
G3.1 / Ad.1 1 AccPn=Linear Acceleration pattern 44865 0h1301 Linear 0
G3.2 / Ad.2 2 DecPn=Linear Deceleration pattern 44866 0h1302 S-curve 1
G3.3 / Ad.3 3 AccSSrt=40% S curve start acceleration slope 44867 0h1303 1 to 100% 1 to 100
G3.4 / Ad.4 4 AccSEnd=40% S curve stop acceleration slope 44868 0h1304 1 to 100% 1 to 100
G3.5 / Ad.5 5 DecSSrt=40% S curve start deceleration slope 44869 0h1305 1 to 100% 1 to 100
G3.6 / Ad.6 6 DecSEnd=40% S curve stop deceleration slope 44870 0h1306 1 to 100% 1 to 100
RAMP 0
G3.7 / Ad.7 7 START=RAMP Motor start mode 44871 0h1307
DCSTART 1
RAMP 0
DC BRAKE 1
G3.8 / Ad.8 8 STOP=RAMP Stop mode 44872 0h1308
SPIN 2
POW BRKE 4
None 0
G3.9 / Ad.9 9 FWR/RV=None Allow speed invertion 44873 0h1309 FWDPrev 1
REVPrev 2
N 0
G3.10 / Ad.10 10 Run Aft VlF=N Power-on Run 44874 0h130A
Y 1
G3.12 / Ad.12 12 DCSt T=0.00s Time to DC Start 44876 0h130C 0.00 to 60.00s 0 to 6000
G3.13 / Ad.13 13 DC Curr=50% Current injection DC start 44877 0h130D 0 to 200% 0 to 200
G3.14 / Ad.14 14 PreDCT=0.10s Pre DC Brake Time 44878 0h130E 0.00 to 60.00s 0 to 6000
G3.15 / Ad.15 15 DCBrkT=1.00s DC brake Time 44879 0h130F 0.00 to 60.00s 0 to 6000
G3.16 / Ad.16 16 DCBkCur=50% Current level DC brake 44880 0h1310 0 to 200% 0 to 200
G3.17 / Ad.17 17 DCBkF=5.00Hz Frequency start DC brake 44881 0h1311 [G1.19]/dr.19 to 60.00 [G1.19]/dr.19 to 6000
[G1.19] to [G1.20] [G1.19] to [G1.20]
G3.20 / Ad.20 20 AcDF=5.00Hz Acceleration dwell frequency 44884 0h1314
(dr.19 to dr.20) (dr.19 to dr.20)
G3.21 / Ad.21 21 AccDWT=0.0s Acceleration dwell time 44885 0h1315 0.0 to 60.0 0 to 600
[G1.19] to [G1.20] [G1.19] to [G1.20]
G3.22 / Ad.22 22 DeDF=5.00Hz Deceleration dwell frequency 44886 0h1316
(dr.19 to dr.20) (dr.19 to dr.20)
G3.23 / Ad.23 23 DecDWT=0.0s Deceleration dwell time 44887 0h1317 0.0 to 60.0S 0 to 600
NO 0
G3.24 / Ad.24 24 UseFrqLimit=N Use frequency limit 44888 0h1318
YES 1
G3.25 / Ad.25 25 FLtLo=0.50Hz Frequency lower limit 44889 0h1319 0.00 to [G3.26]/Ad.26 0 to [G3.26]/Ad.26
[G3.25] to [G1.20] [G3.25] to [G1.20]
G3.26 / Ad.26 26 FLtHi=[G1.20]Hz Frequency higher limit 44890 0h131A
(Ad.25 to dr.20) (Ad.25 to dr.20)
NO 0
G3.27 / Ad.27 27 Jump Freq=N Jump frequency activation 44891 0h131B
YES 1
G3.28 / Ad.28 28 JmpL1=10.00Hz Lower limit jump frequency 1 44892 0h131C 0.00 to [G3.29]/Ad.29 0 to [G3.29]/Ad.29
[G3.28] to [G1.20] [G3.28] to [G1.20]
G3.29 / Ad.29 29 JmpH1=15.00Hz Upper limit jump frequency 1 44893 0h131D
(Ad.28 to dr.20) (Ad.28 to dr.20)
G3.30 / Ad.30 30 JmpL2=20.00Hz Lower limit jump frequency 2 44894 0h131E 0.00 to [G3.31]/Ad.31 0 to [G3.31]/Ad.31
[G3.30] to [G1.20] [G3.30] to [G1.20]
G3.31 / Ad.31 31 JmpH2=25.00Hz Upper limit jump frequency 2 44895 0h131F
(Ad.30 to dr.20) (Ad.30 to dr.20)
G3.32 / Ad.32 32 JmpL3=30.00Hz Lower limit jump frequency 3 44896 0h1320 0.00 to [G3.33]/Ad.33 0 to [G3.33]/Ad.33
[G3.32] to [G1.20] [G3.32] to [G1.20]
G3.33 / Ad.33 33 JmpH3=35.00Hz Upper limit jump frequency 3 44897 0h1321
(Ad.32 to dr.20) (Ad.32 to dr.20)
G3.41 / Ad.41 41 RlsCur=50.0% Open brake current 44905 0h1329 0.0 to 180.0% 0 to 1800
G3.42 / Ad.42 42 RlsDly=1.00s Delay before brake opening 44906 0h132A 0.00 to 10.00s 0 to 1000
G3.44 / Ad.44 44 FwdFq=1.00Hz Brake opening forward freq. 44908 0h132C 0.00 to [G1.20]/dr.20 0 to [G1.20]/dr.20
G3.45 / Ad.45 45 RevFq=1.00Hz Brake opening reverse freq. 44909 0h132D 0.00 to [G1.20]/dr.20 0 to [G1.20]/dr.20
G3.46 / Ad.46 46 BEngDly=1.00s Delay before brake closing 44910 0h132E 0.00 to 10.00s 0 to 10s
G3.47 / Ad.47 47 BEngF=2.00Hz Brake closing frequncy 44911 0h132F 0.00 to [G1.20]/dr.20 0 to [G1.20]/dr.20
NONE 0
G3.50 / Ad.50 50 FLX MIN=NONE Minimum flux mode 44914 0h1332 MANU 1
AUTO 2
G3.51 / Ad.51 51 FluxLVEL=0% Mn. flux level in manual mode 44915 0h1333 0 to 30% 0 to 30
G3.60 / Ad.60 60 XclCF=0.00Hz Acceleration dwell frequency 44924 0h133C 0.00 to [G1.20]/dr.20 0 to [G1.20]/dr.20
DuringRun 0
G3.64 / Ad.64 64 FAN=During Run Fan operating mode 44928 0h1340 Always ON 1
Temp Ctrl 2
Save motorized potentiometer N 0
G3.65 / Ad.65 65 SaveMot Frq=N 44929 0h1341
frequency Y 1
None 0
V1 1
G3.66 / Ad.66 66 SLCOM=None Select comparator source 44930 0h1342 V2 3
I2 4
Pulse 6
Output activation level [G3.68]/Ad.68 to - G3.68]/Ad.68 to
G3.67 / Ad.67 67 ScON=90.00% 44931 0h1343
comparator mode 100.00 100.00
Output deactivation level -100.00 to -10000 to
G3.68 / Ad.68 68 SC OF=10.00% 44932 0h1344
comparator mode [G3.67]/Ad.67 [G3.67]/Ad.67

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 81
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Modbus Address
Parameter Screen Description Range Modbus Range
Decimal Hexadecimal
70 RunEMod=Always Always Enable 0
G3.70 / Ad.70 Safe operation selection 44934 0h1346
Enable DI Dependent 1
Free-Run 0
G3.71 / Ad.71 71 RunDStp=Free Run Safe operation stop 44935 0h1347 Q-Stop 1
Q-Stop Res 2
G3.72 / Ad.72 72 QStpT=5.0s Q-Stop Time 44936 0h1348 0.0 to 600.0s 0 to 6000
NO 0
G3.74 / Ad.74 74 RegAvdSel=N Enable regeneration prevention 44938 0h134A
YES 1
300 to 400V 300 to 400
G3.75 / Ad.75 75 VlRegL=350V / 700V Regeneration prevention level 44939 0h134B
600 to 800V 600 to 800
G3.76 / Ad.76 76 CpFrL=1.00Hz Compare frequency limit 44940 0h134C 0.00 to 10.00Hz 0 to 1000
G3.77 / Ad.77 77 RegAvP=50.0% P gain regeneration prevention 44941 0h134D 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 1000
G3.78 / Ad.78 78 RgAvI=50.0ms I gain regeneration prevention 44942 0h134E 0.0 to 3000.0ms 0 to 30000
None 0
G3.80 / Ad.80 80 FireModSel=None Fire mode selection 44944 0h1350 Fire Mode 1
Fire Mode Test 2
G3.81 / Ad.81 81 FMdFr=60.00Hz Fire mode frequency 44945 0h1351 0.00 to 60.00Hz 0 to 6000
Forward 0
G3.82 / Ad.82 82 FModD=Forward Fire mode direction 44946 0h1352
Reverse 1
G4.4 / Cn.4 4 FREQ=2.0 / 3.0kHz Modulation frequency 45124 0h1404 0.7 to 15.0 7 to 150
Normal PWM 0
G4.5 / Cn.5 5 PWM=Normal PWM Modulation mode 45125 0h1405
LowLeakage PWM 1
G4.9 / Cn.9 9 PreExT=1.00s Pre-excitation time 45129 0h1409 0.00 to 60.00s 0 to 6000
G4.10 / Cn.10 10 PreExF=100.0% Pre-excitation time 45130 0h140A 100.0 to 500.0% 1000 to 5000
G4.11 / Cn.11 11 PwofDl=0.00s Power off delay 45131 0h140B 0.00 to 60.00s 0 to 6000
NO 0
G4.20 / Cn.20 20 SL2GaViSel=N Sensorless control gain 2 45140 0h1414
YES 1
G4.21 / Cn.21 21 ASR P1=500% ASR proportional gain 1 45141 0h1415 0 to 5000% 0 to 5000
G4.22 / Cn.22 22 ASR I1=300ms ASR integral time 1 45142 0h1416 10 to 9999ms 10 to 9999
Independent controller prop.
G4.23 / Cn.23 23 ASR P2=120.0% 45143 0h1417 1.0 to 1000.0% 10 to 10000
gain 2
G4.24 / Cn.24 24 ASR I2=30.0% Indep. controller integral gain 2 45144 0h1418 1.0 to 1000.0% 10 to 10000
G4.25 / Cn.25 25 ASR I1=300ms Integral time sensorless contr. 45145 0h1419 10 to 999ms 10 to 9999
G4.26 / Cn.26 26 P Flux=50% Flux estimator proportional gain 45146 0h141A 1 to 200% 1 to 200
G4.27 / Cn.27 27 I Flux=50% Flux estimator integral gain 45147 0h141B 1 to 200% 1 to 200
G4.28 / Cn.28 28 SpEsP1=100 Speed estimator prop. gain 1 45148 0h141C 0 to 32767 0 to 32767
G4.29 / Cn.29 29 SpEsI1=500 Speed estimator integral gain 1 45149 0h141D 100 to 1000 100 to 1000
G4.30 / Cn.30 30 SpEsI2=2000 Speed estimator integral gain 2 45150 0h141E 100 to 10000 100 to 10000
G4.31 / Cn.31 31 ACR P2=500 Sensorless cont. prop. gain 45151 0h141F 10 to 1000 10 to 1000
G4.32 / Cn.32 32 ACR I2=500 Sensorless cont. integral gain 45152 0h1420 10 to 1000 10 to 1000
G4.48 / Cn.48 48 ACR P1=1200 Controller P gain 45168 0h1430 10 to 10000 10 to 10000
G4.49 / Cn.49 49 ACR I1=120 Controller I gain 45169 0h1431 10 to 10000 10 to 10000
G4.52 / Cn.52 52 OuFVec=0ms Output filter vector 45172 0h1434 0 to 2000ms 0 to 2000
LOCAL 0
V1 2
V2 4
I2 5
G4.53 / Cn.53 53 TqLimRef=LOCAL Torque limit reference 45173 0h1435
MDBUS 6
COMMS 8
PLC 9
Pulse 12
G4.54 / Cn.54 54 TLpsFW=180.0% Forward positive torque limit 45174 0h1436 0.0 to 200.0% 0 to 2000
G4.55 / Cn.55 55 TLngFW=180.0% Forward negative torque limit 45175 0h1437 0.0 to 200.0% 0 to 2000
G4.56 / Cn.56 56 TLpsRV=180.0% Reverse positive torque limit 45176 0h1438 0.0 to 200.0% 0 to 2000
G4.57 / Cn.57 57 TLngRV=180.0% Reverse negative torque limit 45177 0h1439 0.0 to 200.0% 0 to 2000
LOCAL 0
V1 2
V2 4
G4.62 / Cn.62 62 SpLiRf=LOCAL Speed limit reference 45182 0h143E I2 5
MDBUS 6
COMMS 7
PLC 8
G4.63 / Cn.63 63 SpL(+)=50.00Hz Forward speed limit 45183 0h143F 0.00 to 400.00Hz 0 to 40000
G4.64 / Cn.64 64 SpL(-)=50.00Hz Reverse speed limit 45184 0h1440 0.00 to 400.00Hz 0 to 40000
G4.65 / Cn.65 65 SpLGa=500% Speed limit gain 45185 0h1441 100 to 5000% 100 to 5000
Flying Start1 0
G4.70 / Cn.70 70 SSMode=Flying Start1 Speed search mode selection 45190 0h1446
Flying Start2 1
G4.71 / Cn.71 71 Srch Mod=0000 Search mode 45191 0h1447 00 to 15 0 to 15
G4.72 / Cn.72 72 Srch I=150% Speed search mode current 45192 0h1448 80 to 200% 80 to 200
G4.73 / Cn.73 73 Kp Srch=100/600 Speed search mode prop. gain 45193 0h1449 0 to 9999 0 to 9999
G4.74 / Cn.74 74 Ki Srch=100/600 Speed search integral gain 45194 0h144A 0 to 9999 0 to 9999

82 MODBUS COMMUNICATION
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Modbus Address
Parameter Screen Description Range Modbus Range
Decimal Hexadecimal
G4.75 / Cn.75 75 SrchDly=1.0s Speed search delay 45195 0h144B 0.0 to 60.0s 0 to 600
G4.76 / Cn.76 76 SpEsGa=100% Speed estimator gain 45196 0h144C 50 to 150% 50 to 150
No 0
G4.77 / Cn.77 77 KEB Sel=No KEB Select 45197 0h144D KEB1 1
KEB2 2
G4.78 / Cn.78 78 KEBStr=125.0% Initial value for KEB operation 45198 0h144E 110.0 to 200.0% 1100 to 2000
[G4.78]/Cn.78 to
G4.79 / Cn.79 79 KEBStp=130.0% Value to stop KEB operation 45199 0h144F [G4.78]/Cn.78 to 2100
210.0%
G4.80 / Cn.80 80 KEBPGn=10000 KEB proportional gain 45200 0h1450 1 to 20000 1 to 20000
G4.81 / Cn.81 81 KEBIGn=500 KEB integral gain 45201 0h1451 1 to 20000 1 to 20000
G4.85 / Cn.85 85 FlxPrGa1=370 Flux proportional gain 1 45205 0h1455 100 to 700 100 to 700
G4.86 / Cn.86 86 FlxPrGa2=0 Flux proportional gain 2 45206 0h1456 0 to 100 0 to 100
G4.87 / Cn.87 87 FlxPrGa3=100 Flux proportional gain 3 45207 0h1457 0 to 500 0 to 500
G4.88 / Cn.88 88 FlxInGa1=50 Flux integral gain 1 45208 0h1458 0 to 200 0 to 200
G4.89 / Cn.89 89 FlxInGa2=50 Flux integral gain 2 45209 0h1459 0 to 200 0 to 200
G4.90 / Cn.90 90 FlxInGa3=50 Flux integral gain 3 45210 0h145A 0 to 200 0 to 200
G4.91 / Cn.91 91 SLVoCmp1=20 SL voltage compensation 1 45211 0h145B 0 to 60 0 to 60
G4.92 / Cn.92 92 SLVoCmp2=20 SL voltage compensation 2 45212 0h145C 0 to 60 0 to 60
G4.93 / Cn.93 93 SLVoCmp3=20 SL voltage compensation 3 45213 0h145D 0 to 60 0 to 60
G4.94 / Cn.94 94 FWFrS=100.0% SL fluctuation frequency 45214 0h145E 80.0 to 110.0% 800 to 1100
G4.95 / Cn.95 95 FcFrS= 2.00Hz SL switching frequency 45215 0h145F 0.00 to 8.00Hz 0 to 800
[G1.19] to [G1.20] [G1.19] to [G1.20]
G5.1 / In.1 1 MxFA=[G1.20]/dr.20Hz Analog input max. freq 45377 0h1501
(dr.19 to dr.20) (dr.19 to dr.20)
G5.2 / In.2 2 MaxTrq=100.0% Analog input max. torque 45378 0h1502 0.0 to 200.0 0 to 2000
G5.5 / In.5 5 AnlgIN1=0.00V V1 Monitor 45381 0h1505 0.00 to 12.00% 0 to 1200
0-10V 0
G5.6 / In.6 6 An1PT=0-10V V1 polarity 45382 0h1506
-/+10V 1
G5.7 / In.7 7 Ain1LP=10ms V1 filter 45383 0h1507 0 to 10000ms 0 to 10000
G5.8 / In.8 8 A1MnV=0.00V V1 minimum voltage 45384 0h1508 0.00 to 10.00V 0 to 1000
G5.9 / In.9 9 A1MnR=0.00% V1 minimum reference 45385 0h1509 0.00 to 100.00% 0 to 10000
G5.10 / In.10 10 An1MxV=10.00V V1 maximum voltage 45386 0h150A 0.00 to 10.00V 0 to 1000
G5.11 / In.11 11 A1MxR=10.00% V1 maximum reference 45387 0h150B 0.00 to 100.00% 0 to 10000
G5.12 / In.12 12 A1NMn=-10.00V V1 minimum negative voltage 45388 0h150C -10.00 to 0.00V -1000 to 0
G5.13 / In.13 13 A1MnR=-10.00% V1 minimum negative reference 45389 0h150D -100.00 to 0.00% -10000 to 0
G5.14 / In.14 14 A1MxV=-10.00V V1 maximum negative voltage 45390 0h150E -10.00 to 0.00V -1000 to 0
G5.15 / In.15 15 A1Mx=-10.00% V1 maximum neg. reference 45391 0h150F -100.00 to 0.00% -10000 to 0
NO 0
G5.16 / In.1 16 V1 Invert=N V1 Inverting 45392 0h1510
YES 1
G5.17 / In.17 17 A1DeLl=0.04% Adjust V1 quantification 45393 0h1511 0.04 to 10.00% 4 to 1000
G5.35 / In.35 35 AngIN2=0.00V V2 Monitor 45411 0h1523 0.00 to 12.00V 0 to 1200
G5.37 / In.37 37 A2LPF=10ms V2 filter 45413 0h1525 0 to 10000ms 0 to 10000
G5.38 / In.38 38 A2MnC=0.00V V2 minimum voltage 45414 0h1526 0.00 to 10.00V 0 to 1000
G5.39 / In.39 39 A2MnR=0.00% V2 minimum reference 45415 0h1527 0.00 to 100.00% 0 to 10000
G5.40 / In.40 40 A2MxC=10.00V V2 maximum voltage 45416 0h1528 0.00 to 10.00V 0 to 1000
G5.41 / In.41 41 A2MxR=100.00% V2 maximum reference 45417 0h1529 0.00 to 100.00% 0 to 10000
NO 0
G5.46 / In.46 46 V2 Invert=N V2 Inverting 45422 0h152E
YES 1
G5.47 / In.47 47 A2DeLl=0.04% Adjust I2 visualization 45423 0h152F 0.04 to 10.00% 4 to 1000
G5.50 / In.50 50 AnI2=0.00mA I2 Monitor 45426 0h1532 0.00 to 24.00mA 0 to 2500
G5.52 / In.52 52 AI2LF=10ms I2 filter 45428 0h1534 0 to 10000ms 0 to 10000
G5.53 / In.53 53 A3MnC=4.00mA I2 minimum current 45429 0h1535 0.00 to 20.00mA 0 to 2000
G5.54 / In.54 54 A3MnR=0.00% I2 minimum reference 45430 0h1536 0.00 to 100.00% 0 to 10000
G5.55 / In.55 55 A2MxC=10.00mA I2 maximum current 45431 0h1537 0.00 to 24.00mA 0 to 1000
G5.56 / In.56 56 A2MxR=100.00% I2 maximum reference 45432 0h1538 0.00 to 100.00 0 to 10000
N 0
G5.61 / In.61 61 I2 Invert=N I2 Inverting 45437 0h153D
Y 1
G5.62 / In.62 62 A2DeLl=0.04% Adjust I2 visualization 45438 0h153E 0.04 to 10.00% 4 to 1000
None 0
START(+) 1
G5.65 / In.65 65 DI1= START(+) Digital input 1 45441 0h1541
START(-) 2
RESET 3
EXT TRIP 4
DIS START 5
INCH 1 6
G5.66 / In.66 66 DI2=START(-) Digital input 2 45442 0h1542
SPEED-L 7
SPEED-M 8

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 83
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Modbus Address
Parameter Screen Description Range Modbus Range
Decimal Hexadecimal
SPEED-H 9
XCEL-L 11
G5.67 / In.67 67 DI3=RESET Digital input 3 45443 0h1543 XCEL-M 12
RUN Enable 13
3-WIRE 14
CTR/REF 2 15
Exchange 16
G5.68 / In.68 68 DI4=RESET Digital input 4 45444 0h1544 UP 17
DOWN 18
RESERVED 19
POT CLEAR 20
AnalogHLD 21
G5.69 / In.69 69 DI5=SPEED-L Digital input 5 45445 0h1545 PIDOPLoop 22
P Gain 2 24
XCEL Stop 25
2nd Motor 26
Pre-Excit 34
G5.70 / In.70 70 DI6=SPEED-M Digital input 6 45446 0h1546 Timer IN 38
disAuxRef. 40
INCH(+) 46
INCH(-) 47
XCEL-H 49
PLC 50
G5.71 / In.71 71 DI7=SPEED-H Digital input 7 45447 0h1547
Fire Mode 51
KEB1 Sel 52
TI 54
G5.85 / In.85 85 DIOnF=10ms Digital input activation delay 45461 0h1555 0 to 10000ms 0 to 10000
G5.86 / In.86 86 DIOfF=3ms Digital input deactivation delay 45462 0h1556 0 to 10000ms 0 to 10000
0: Contact normally
open (NO)
G5.87 / In.87 87 DCTy=0000 Digital input contact type 45463 0h1557 0000 to 1111
1: Contact normally
closed (NC)
G5.89 / In.89 89 DiScan=1ms Di Scan Time 45465 0h1559 1 to 5000ms 1 to 5000
0: Disabled
G5.90 / In.90 90 StDI=0000 Digital inputs status 45466 0h155A 0000 to 1111
1: Enabled
G5.91 / In.91 91 TIPls=0.00kHz TI Monitor 45467 0h155B 0.00 to 50.00kHz 0 to 5000
G5.92 / In.92 92 TIFlt=400ms TI Filter 45468 0h155C 0 to 9999 0 to 9999
G5.93 / In.93 93 TIMn=0.00kHz TI minimum input frequency 45469 0h155D 0.00 to 32.00kHz 0 to 3200
TI minimum input frequency
G5.94 / In.94 94 TIMnR=0.00% 45470 0h155E 0.00 to 100.00% 0 to 10000
percentage
G5.95 / In.95 95 TIMx=32.00kHz TI maximum input frequency 45471 0h155F 0.00 to 32.00kHz 0 to 3200
TI maximum input frequency
G5.96 / In.96 96 TIMxR=100.00% 45472 0h1560 0.00 to 100.00% 0 to 10000
percentage
NO 0
G5.97 / In.97 97 TI Invert=N TI Inverting 45473 0h1561
YES 1
G5.98 / In.98 98 TIDeLl=0.04% TI noise reduction level 45474 0h1562 0.04 to 10.00% 4 to 1000
V2, NPN 00
V2, PNP 01
G5.99 / In.99 99 IOSWST=00 Input mode setting 45475 0h1563
I2, NPN 10
I2, PNP 11
Frequency 0
O/pCurr 1
O/pVolt 2
DCLinkV 3
Torque 4
O/pPower 5
Idse 6
G6.1 / OU.1 1 AO1=Frequency Analog output 1 mode selection 45633 0h1601 Iqse 7
TargetFq 8
RampFreq 9
Speed Fdb 10
PIDRefVal 12
PIDFdbVal 13
PIDO/p 14
Constant 15
G6.2 / OU.2 2 AO1Ga=100.0% Analog output 1 gain 45634 0h1602 -1000.0 to 1000.0% -10000 to 10000
G6.3 / OU.3 3 AO1Ofs=0.0% Analog output 1 offset 45635 0h1603 -100.0 to 100.0% -1000 to 1000
G6.4 / OU.4 4 AO1Fil=5ms Analog output 1 filter 45636 0h1604 0 to 10000ms 0 to 10000
G6.5 / OU.5 5 AO1Con=0.0% Analog output 1 constant 45637 0h1605 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 1000
G6.6 / OU.6 6 ANOUT1=0.0% Analog output 1 monitor 45638 0h1606 0.0 to 1000.0% 0 to 10000
Low voltage 001
Other than low 010
G6.30 / OU.30 30 OP FLT RLY=010 Relay fault output 45662 0h161E
voltage
Automatic restart 100

84 MODBUS COMMUNICATION
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Modbus Address
Parameter Screen Description Range Modbus Range
Decimal Hexadecimal
None 0
FDT-1 1
FDT-2 2
FDT-3 3
FDT-4 4
OverLoad 5
IOL 6
G6.31 / OU.31 31 RLY1=Trip Relay 1 control source 45663 0h161F UndrLoad 7
VentWarn 8
Stall 9
OverVolt 10
LowVolt 11
OverHeat 12
Lost Command 13
Run 14
Stop 15
Steady 16
Inv. Line 17
Comm Line 18
Spd Srch 19
Ready 22
Timer Out 28
Trip 29
G6.33 / OU.33 33 DOP1=Run Digital ouput 1 function 45665 0h1621
DBWarn%ED 31
COMPARAT 34
BRCtrl 35
CAP Exch. 36
FAN Exch. 37
Fire Mode 38
TO 39
KEB Op. 40
G6.41 / OU.41 41 DO Sts=00 Digital ouputs status 45673 0h1629 00 to 11 0 to 3
G6.50 / OU.50 50 TRLON=0.00s Digital output connection delay 45682 0h1632 0.00 to 100.00s 0 to 10000
Digital output disconnection
G6.51 / OU.51 51 TRLOF=0.00s 45683 0h1633 0.00 to 100.00s 0 to 10000
delay
0: Contact normally
open (NO)
G6.52 / OU.52 52 INV YES/NC=00 NC/NO Relays logic 45684 0h1634 00 a 11
1: Contact normally
closed (NC)
Digital output connection delay
G6.53 / OU.53 53 TOnDl=0.00s 45685 0h1635 0.00 to 100.00s 0 to 10000
on fault
Digital output disconnection
G6.54 / OU.54 54 TOfDl=0.00s 45686 0h1636 0.00 to 100.00s 0 to 10000
delay on fault
G6.55 / OU.55 55 TiOnD=0.00s Digital output connection delay 45687 0h1637 0.00 to 100.00s 0 to 10000
Digital output disconnection
G6.56 / OU.56 56 TOfDl=0.00s 45688 0h1638 0.00 to 100.00s 0 to 10000
delay
G6.57 / OU.57 57 FDTLv=30.00Hz Relay FDT level 45689 0h1639 0.00 to [G1.20]/dr.20 0 to [G1.20]/dr.20
G6.58 / OU.58 58 FDTBd=10.00Hz Relay FDT band 45690 0h163A 0.00 to [G1.20]/dr.20 0 to [G1.20]/dr.20
Frequency 0
O/pCurr 1
O/pVolt 2
DCLinkV 3
Torque 4
O/pPower 5
Idse 6
G6.61 / OU.61 61 TOM=Frequency Pulse output mode 45693 0h163D Iqse 7
TargetFq 8
RampFreq 9
Speed Fdb 10
PIDRefVal 12
PIDFdbVal 13
PIDO/p 14
Constant 15
G6.62 / OU.62 62 TOGa=100.0% Pulse output gain 45694 0h163E -1000.0 to 1000.0% -10000 to 10000
G6.63 / OU.63 63 TOOfs=0.0% Pulse output offset 45695 0h163F -100.0 to 100.0% -1000 to 1000
G6.64 / OU.64 64 TOFil=5ms Pulse output filter 45696 0h1640 0 to 10000ms 0 to 10000
G6.65 / OU.65 65 TOCon=0.0% Pulse output constant setting 45697 0h1641 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 1000
G6.66 / OU.66 66 TO=0.0% Pulse output monitor 45698 0h1642 0.0 to 1000.0% 0 to 10000
G7.1 / CM.1 1 Slave Addr=1 Slave address 45889 0h1701 1 to 250 1 to 250
Modbus 0
G7.2 / CM.2 2 Prot=Modbus RS-485 communication protocol 45890 0h1702
PE BUS 485 1

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 85
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Modbus Address
Parameter Screen Description Range Modbus Range
Decimal Hexadecimal
1200 bps 0
2400 bps 1
4800 bps 2
9600 bps 3
G7.3 / CM.3 3 BaudR=9600bps BaudRate 45891 0h1703
19200 bps 4
38400 bps 5
56 Kbps 6
115 Kbps 7
D8/PN/S1 0
D8/PN/S2 1
G7.4 / CM.4 4 Mode=D8/PN/S1 Communication frame structure 45892 0h1704
D8/PE/S1 2
D8/PO/S1 3
G7.5 / CM.5 5 RespDly=5ms Response delay 45893 0h1705 0 to 100.0 ms 0 to 1000
Communication option S/W 0h1706
CM.6 - - - -
version
CM.7 - Communication option ID - 0h1707 0 to 255 0 to 255
CM.8 - Card baud rate - 0h1708 - -
CM.9 - Comm. option LED status - 0h1709 - -
CM.30 - Output parameters number - 0h171E 0 to 8 0 to 8
CM.31 - - 0h171F
CM.32 - - 0h1720
CM.33 - - 0h1721
CM.34 - Output communication - 0h1722
0000 to FFFF 0000 to FFFF
CM.35 - addresses 1 to 8 - 0h1723
CM.36 - - 0h1724
CM.37 - - 0h1725
CM.38 - - 0h1726
CM.50 - Number of input parameters - 0h1732 0 to 8 0 to 8
CM.51 - - 0h1733
CM.52 - - 0h1734
CM.53 - - 0h1735
CM.54 - Input communication addresses - 0h1736
0000 to FFFF 0000 to FFFF
CM.55 - 1 to 8 - 0h1737
CM.56 - - 0h1738
CM.57 - - 0h1739
CM.58 - - 0h173A
NO 0
CM.68 - Field bus data swap - 0h1744
YES 1
None 0
START(+) 1
CM.70 - - 0h1746 START(-) 2
RESET 3
EXTTRIP 4
DISSTART 5
CM.71 - - 0h1747 INCH1 6
SPEED-L 7
SPEED-M 8
SPEED-H 9
CM.72 - - 0h1748 XCEL-L 11
XCEL-M 12
RUNEnable 13
3-WIRE 14
CTR/REF2 15
CM.73 - - 0h1749 Exchange 16
UP 17
Communication multifunction
DOWN 18
input 1 to 7
POTCLEAR 20
CM.74 - - 0h174A AnalogHLD 21
I-Term Clear 22
PIDOPLoop 23
PGain2 24
XCELStop 25
CM.75 - - 0h174B 2ndMotor 26
Pre-Excit 34
TimerIN 38
disAuxRef. 40
CM.76 - - 0h174C INCH(+) 46
INCH(-) 47
XCEL-H 49
PLC 50
CM.77 - - 0h174D FireMode 51
KEB1Sel 52
TI 54

86 MODBUS COMMUNICATION
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Modbus Address
Parameter Screen Description Range Modbus Range
Decimal Hexadecimal
Communication multifunction
CM.86 - - 0h1756 - -
input monitoring
PE BUS 485 0
CM.90 - Data frame comm. monitor - 0h175A
Rem. display 1
CM.91 - Received data frames counter - 0h175B 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
CM.92 - Frames with error counter - 0h175C 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
CM.93 - NAK frames counter - 0h175D 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
NO 0
G7.94 / CM.94 94 Actualizar comms=N Communications update - -
YES 1
Disable All 0
P2P Master 1
CM.95 - P2P communication selection - 0h1760
P2P Slave 2
M-KPD Ready 3
Analog output 001
CM.96 - Digital output selection - - Multi function relay 010
Multi funtion output 100
None 0
G8.1 / AP.1 1 ApMod=Proc PID Application function selection 46145 0h1801
Proc PID 2
N 0
G8.2 / AP.2 2 UsSeqEn=N Enable PLC mode - -
Y 1
G8.16 / AP.16 16 PIDOut=+0.0% PID output 46160 0h1810 -327.68 to 327.68% 32768 to 32768
G8.17 / AP.17 17 PIDRef=+50.00% PID reference 46161 0h1811 -327.68 to 327.68% 32768 to 32768
G8.18 / AP.18 18 PIDFdb=+0.00% PID feedback 46162 0h1812 -327.68 to 327.68% 32768 to 32768
G8.19 / AP.19 19 PIDLo=+50.00% PID local 46163 0h1813 -100.00 to 100.00% 10000 to 10000
MREF 0
V1 1
V2 3
I2 4
G8.20 / AP.20 20 SELREF=MREF Select PID regulator source 46164 0h1814
MODBUS 5
COMMS 7
PLC 8
PULSE 11
V1 0
V2 2
I2 3
G8.21 / AP.21 21 SELFBK=V1 Select feedback signal source 46165 0h1815 MODBUS 4
COMMS 6
PLC 7
PULSE 10
G8.22 / AP.22 22 GANKp=+50.0% PID controller proportional gain 46166 0h1816 0.0 to 1000.0% 0 to 10000
G8.23 / AP.23 23 INTEGRL=10.0s PID controller integration time 46167 0h1817 0 to 200.0s 0 to 2000
G8.24 / AP.24 24 DIFFE=0ms PID controller differential time 46168 0h1818 0.0 to 10000ms 0 to 10000
G8.25 / AP.25 25 GAINF=+0.0% PID output fine adjustment 46169 0h1819 0.0 to 1000.0% 0 to 10000
G8.26 / AP.26 26 PGaSca=100.0% Proportional gain scale 46170 0h181A 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 1000
G8.27 / AP.27 27 PIDFl=0ms PID Filter 46171 0h181B 0 to 10000ms 0 to 10000
Process 0
G8.28 / AP.28 28 PIDMd=Process PID Mode 46172 0h181C
Normal 1
[G8.30]/AP.30 to [G8.30]/AP.30 to
G8.29 / AP.29 29 MxSL=+60.00Hz Upper limit PID output 46173 0h181D
300.00Hz 30000
-300.00Hz to -30000 to
G8.30 / AP.30 30 MnSL=-60.00Hz Lower limit PID output 46174 0h181E
[G8.29]/AP.29 [G8.29]/AP.29
NO 0
G8.31 / AP.31 31 INVERT PID=N Invert PID 46175 0h181F
YES 1
G8.32 / AP.32 32 OutSc=+100.00% PID output scale 46176 0h1820 0.1 to 1000.0% 1 to 10000
G8.34 / AP.34 34 PPIDR=0.00Hz PrePID reference 46178 0h1822 0.00 to [G1.20]/dr.20 0 to 40000
G8.35 / AP.35 35 PPIDE=0.0% PrePID end reference 46179 0h1823 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 1000
G8.36 / AP.36 36 PPIDTim=600s PrePID delay 46180 0h1824 0 to 9999s 0 to 9999
G8.37 / AP.37 37 LPTSlp=60.0s Sleep mode activation delay 46181 0h1825 0.0 to 999.9s 0 to 9999
0.00Hz to
G8.38 / AP.38 38 SlpSp=0.00Hz Sleep mode activation speed 46182 0h1826 0 to [G1.20]/dr.20
[G1.20]/dr.20
G8.39 / AP.39 39 LPPon=+35% Awakening level 46183 0h1827 0 to 100% 0 to 100
Below 0
G8.40 / AP.40 40 WkUPID=Below PID WakeUp Mode 46184 0h1828 Above 1
Beyond 2

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 87
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Modbus Address
Parameter Screen Description Range Modbus Range
Decimal Hexadecimal
% 0
Bar 1
mBar 2
Pa 3
kPa 4
Hz 5
G8.42 / AP.42 42 PIDUn=% PID unit 46186 0h182A rpm 6
V 7
I 8
kW 9
HP 10
C 11
F 12
0.00 to
G8.43 / AP.43 43 PIDuG=100.00% PID unit gain 46187 0h182B 0 to 30000
300.00%
x100 0
x10 1
G8.44 / AP.44 44 PIDUnSc=x1 PID scale unit 46188 0h182C x1 2
x 0.1 3
x 0.01 4
G8.45 / AP.45 45 GaKp2=100.0% Proportional gain 46189 0h182D 0.0 to 1000.0% 0 to 10000
NRML 0
G9.4 / Pr.4 4 Load Duty=Hevy Load duty type 46916 0h1B04
HEVY 1
NONE 0
OUTPUT 1
G9.5 / Pr.5 5 LSS PH=NONE Phase loss type 46917 0h1B05
INPUT 2
ALL 3
G9.6 / Pr.6 6 Ripple V=15V Ripple voltage 46918 0h1B06 1 to 100V 1 to 100
G9.7 / Pr.7 7 FlDecT=3.0s Fault deceleration time 46919 0h1B07 0.0 to 600.0s 0 to 6000
N 0
G9.8 / Pr.8 8 Str Aft Rst=N Start after restart 46920 0h1B08
Y 1
G9.9 / Pr.9 9 Retry Num=0 Retry attempts number 46921 0h1B09 0 to 10 0 to 10
G9.10 / Pr.10 10 RetryDly=1.0s Retry delay 46922 0h1B0A 0.0 to 60.0s 0 to 600
None 0
Free-Run 1
Response in case of a speed Dec 2
G9.12 / Pr.12 12 RIRLs=None 46924 0h1B0C
reference loss Hold Input 3
Hold Output 4
Lost Preset 5
G9.13 / Pr.13 13 RfLsDl=1.0s Lost reference delay 46925 0h1B0D 0.1 to 120.0s 0 to 1200
[G1.19] to [G1.20] [G1.19] to [G1.20]
G9.14 / Pr.14 14 RfLRf=0.00Hz Reference for lost reference 46926 0h1B0E
(dr.19 to dr.20) (dr.19 to dr.20)
Half 0
G9.15 / Pr.15 15 AILL=Half AI Lost Level 46928 0h1B10
Below 1
NO 0
G9.17 / Pr.17 17 OlWarnSel=YES Overload warning select 46929 0h1B11
YES 1
G9.18 / Pr.18 18 OLWrnL=+150% Overload warning level 46930 0h1B12 30 to 180% 30 to 180
G9.19 / Pr.19 19 OLWrnT=10.0s Overload warning time 46931 0h1B13 0.0 to 30.0s 0 to 300
None 0
G9.20 / Pr.20 20 OLTS=Freerun Overload trip select 46932 0h1B14 Free-Run 1
Dec 2
G9.21 / Pr.11 21 OLLevel=180% Overload level 46933 0h1B15 30 to 200% 30 to 200
G9.22 / Pr.22 22 OLTrpT=60.0s Overload trip time 46934 0h1B16 0.0 to 60.0s 0 to 600
NO 0
G9.25 / Pr.25 25 EnableUL=YES Enable underload 46937 0h1B19
YES 1
G9.26 / Pr.26 26 ULWnDl=10.0s Underload warning delay 46938 0h1B1A 0.0 to 600.0s 0 to 6000
None 0
G9.27 / Pr.27 27 ULFM=None Underload fault mode 46939 0h1B1B Free-Run 1
Dec 2
G9.28 / Pr.28 28 ULFlDl=30.0 Underload fault delay 46940 0h1B1C 0.0 to 600.0s 0 to 6000
G9.29 / Pr.29 29 UlMnL=+30% Underload minimum level 46941 0h1B1D 10 to 100% 10 to 100
G9.30 / Pr.30 30 ULMxL=+30% Underload maximum level 46942 0h1B1E 10 to 100% 10 to 100
None 0
Action in case no motor is
G9.31 / Pr.31 31 NoMD=None 46943 0h1B1F Free-Run 1
detected
Dec 2
G9.32 / Pr.32 32 NoMtrLv=+5% No motor fault level 46944 0h1B20 1 to 100% 1 to 100
G9.33 / Pr.33 33 NoMtrDl=3.0s No motor fault delay 46945 0h1B21 0.1 to 10.0s 1 to 100
None 0
Action in case of thermo-
G9.40 / Pr.40 40 ThMM=None 46952 0h1B28 Free-Run 1
electronic fault
Dec 2
Motor cooling mode at zero SELF 0
G9.41 / Pr.41 41 MTCOOL=SELF 46953 0h1B29
speed FORCED 1

88 MODBUS COMMUNICATION
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Modbus Address
Parameter Screen Description Range Modbus Range
Decimal Hexadecimal
G9.42 / Pr.42 42 ETH1min=150% Overcurrent level during 1min 46954 0h1B2A 120 to 200% 120 to 200
G9.43 / Pr.43 43 ETHcont=+120% Continuous overcurrent level 46955 0h1B2B 50 to 150% 50 to 150
FreeRun 0
G9.45 / Pr.45 45 BSMod=FreeRun Free run trip mode 46957 0h1B2D
Dec 1
Accelerating 00
At constant speed 01
G9.50 / Pr.50 50 StallPR=00 Stall prevention 46962 0h1B32
At deceleration 10
FluxBraking 11
[G1.19] to [G9.53] [G1.19] to [G9.53]
G9.51 / Pr.51 51 StFr1=60Hz Speed for stall protection 1 46963 0h1B33
(dr.19 to Pr.53) Hz (dr.19 to Pr.53)
G9.52 / Pr.52 52 StlLev1=180% Level for stall protection 1 46964 0h1B34 30 to 250% 30 to 250
[G5.51] to [G9.55] [G5.51] to [G9.55]
G9.53 / Pr.53 53 StFr2=60Hz Speed for stall protection 2 46965 0h1B35
(In.51 to Pr.55) Hz (In.51 to Pr.55)
G9.54 / Pr.54 54 StlLev2=180% Level for stall protection 2 46966 0h1B36 30 to 250% 30 to 250
[G5.53] to [G9.57] [G5.53] to [G9.57]
G9.55 / Pr.55 55 StFr3=60Hz Speed for stall protection 3 46967 0h1B37
(In.53 to Pr.57) Hz (In.53 to Pr.57)
G9.56 / Pr.56 56 StlLev3=180% Level for stall protection 3 46968 0h1B38 30 to 250% 30 to 250
[G5.55] to [G1.20] [G5.55] to [G1.20]
G9.57 / Pr.57 57 StFr4=60Hz Speed for stall protection 4 46969 0h1B39
(In.55 to dr.20) Hz (In.55 to dr.20)
G9.58 / Pr.58 58 StlLev4=180% Level for stall protection 4 46970 0h1B3A 30 to 250% 30 to 250
G9.59 / Pr.59 59 FB Kp=0% Flux braking gain 46971 0h1B3B 0 to 150% 0 to 150
G9.60 / Pr.60 60 CAPDgLV=0% CAP diagnosis level 46972 0h1B3C 0 to 100% 0 to 100
Nonde 0
RefDiag 1
G9.61 / Pr.61 61 CAPDg=+0% Capacitor diagnosis mode 46973 0h1B3D
PreDiag 2
InitDiag 3
G9.62 / Pr.62 62 CAPExLv=0% CAP exchange warning level 46974 0h1B3E 0.0 to 95.0% 0 to 950
G9.63 / Pr.63 63 CAPDgL=0.0% Capacitance reference 46975 0h1B3F 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 1000
G9.66 / Pr.66 66 DBWarnED=+0% Braking resistor configuration 46978 0h1B42 0 to 30% 0 to 30
N 0
G9.73 / Pr.73 73 SpdDev=N Speed deviation fault 46946 0h1B22
Y 1
G9.74 / Pr.74 74 SpdDevLv=50 Speed deviation band 46947 0h1B23 1 to 20 1 to 20
G9.75 / Pr.75 75 SpdDevTi=60 Speed deviation time 46948 0h1B24 1 to 120 1 to 120
Trip 0
G9.79 / Pr.79 79 FANTrip=Warn Action in case of fan trip 46991 0h1B4F
Warn 1
None 0
G9.80 / Pr.80 80 TrpMd=FreeRun Optional card trip mode 46992 0h1B50 Free-Run 1
Dec 2
G9.81 / Pr.81 81 LVT Dly=0.0s Low voltage trip delay 46993 0h1B51 0.0 to 60.0s 0 to 600
NO 0
G9.82 / Pr.82 82 LV2 On=YES Enable low voltage trip 46994 0h1B52
YES 1
G9.86 / Pr.86 86 FanTi=0% Fan use percentage 46998 0h1B56 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 1000
G9.87 / Pr.87 87 FanELv=90.0% Fan exchange warning level 46999 0h1B57 0.0 to 100.0% 0 to 1000
N 0
G9.88 / Pr.88 88 FanTiRst=N Fan time reset 47000 0h1B58
Y 1
None 00
G9.89 / Pr.89 89 CAP FAN St=0 CAP fan status 47001 0h1B59 CAP warning 01
FAN warning 10
G10.4 / M2.4 4 AccTi=20.0s Motor 2 acceleration ramp 47172 0h1C04 0.0 to 600.0s 0 to 6000
G10.5 / M2.5 5 DECEL=30.0s Motor 2 deceleration ramp 47173 0h1C05 0.0 to 600.0s 0 to 6000
0.2kW 0
0.4kW 1
0.75kW 2
1.1kW 3
1.5kW 4
2.2kW 5
3.0kW 6
3.7kW 7
G10.6 / M2.6 6 MTR2PWR=4.0kW Motor 2 rated power 47174 0h1C06
4.0kW 8
5.5kW 9
7.5kW 10
11.0kW 11
15.0kW 12
18.5kW 13
22.0kW 14
30.0kW 15
G10.7 / M2.7 7 MTRFRQ=60.00Hz Motor 2 frequency 47175 0h1C07 30.00 to 400.00Hz 3000 to 40000
V/Hz 0
G10.8 / M2.8 8 Ctr. T=V/Hz Control type selection 47176 0h1C08 SlipCom 2
S-less1 4

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 89
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Modbus Address
Parameter Screen Description Range Modbus Range
Decimal Hexadecimal
2 2
4 4
G10.10 / M2.10 10 POLE Numbr=4 Poles number 47178 0h1C0A

48 48
G10.11 / M2.11 11 RtSlp=64rpm Rated slip 47179 0h1C0B 0 to 3000rpm 0 to 3000
G10.12 / M2.12 12 MTRCUR=8.6A Motor nominal current 47180 0h1C0C 1.0 to 200.0A 10 to 2000
G10.13 / M2.13 13 NOLODC=3.1A No load current 47181 0h1C0D 0.5 to 200.0A 5 to 2000
G10.14 / M2.14 14 MTR VOLT=0V Motor 2 voltage 47182 0h1C0E 180 to 480V 180 to 480
G10.15 / M2.15 15 EFFICIEN=+84% Motor 2 efficiency 47183 0h1C0F 70 to 100% 70 to 100
G10.16 / M2.16 16 InertiaRate=0 Motor 2 inertia rate 47184 0h1C10 0 to 8 0 to 8
G10.17 / M2.17 17 Rs=138.8m* Stator resistor 47185 0h1C11 0 to 9999
Depend on motor
G10.18 / M2.18 18 LSigma=1.244mH Leak inductor 47186 0h1C12 0 to 9999
setting
G10.19 / M2.19 19 Ls=16.45mH Stator inductor 47187 0h1C13 0 to 9999
G10.20 / M2.20 20 Tr=228ms Rotor time constant 47188 0h1C14 25 to 5000ms 5000
Linear 0
Square 1
G10.25 / M2.25 25 V/FPn=Linear V/F pattern 47193 0h1C19
V/F User 2
Square2 3
G10.26 / M2.26 26 FWBoost=+2.0% Torque in forward direction 47194 0h1C1A 0.0 to 15.0% 0 to 150
G10.27 / M2.27 27 RVBoost=+2.0% Torque in reverse direction 47195 0h1C1B 0.0 to 15.0% 0 to 150
G10.28 / M2.28 28 StlLev1=150% Stall prevention level motor 2 47196 0h1C1C 30 to 150% 30 to 150
G10.29 / M2.29 29 ETH1min=+150% Motor 2 overcurrent level 1 min 47197 0h1C1D 100 to 200% 100 to 200
G10.30 / M2.30 30 ETHcont=+100% Motor 2 continuous overcurrent 47198 0h1C1E 50 to 150% 50 to 150
Stop 0
G11.1 / US.1 1 OpComm=Stop PLC operation mode 47425 0h1D01 Run 1
Run DI 2
0.01s 0
0.02s 1
0.05s 2
G11.2 / US.2 2 LoopTime=0.02s PLC loop time 47426 0h1D02
0.1s 3
0.5s 4
1s 5
G11.11 / US.11 11 LkOut1=0 Output link address PLC func. 1 47435 0h1D0B 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.12 / US.12 12 LkOut2=0 Output link address PLC func. 2 47436 0h1D0C 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.13 / US.13 13 LkOut3=0 Output link address PLC func. 3 47437 0h1D0D 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.14 / US.14 14 LkOut4=0 Output link address PLC func. 4 47438 0h1D0E 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.15 / US.15 15 LkOut5=0 Output link address PLC func. 5 47439 0h1D0F 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.16 / US.16 16 LkOut6=0 Output link address PLC func. 6 47440 0h1D10 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.17 / US.17 17 LkOut7=0 Output link address PLC func. 7 47441 0h1D11 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.18 / US.18 18 LkOut8=0 Output link address PLC func. 8 47442 0h1D12 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.19 / US.19 19 LkOut9=0 Output link address PLC func. 9 47443 0h1D13 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.20 / US.20 20 LkOut10=0 Output link addr. PLC func. 10 47444 0h1D14 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.21 / US.21 21 LkOut11=0 Output link addr. PLC func. 11 47445 0h1D15 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.22 / US.22 22 LkOut12=0 Output link addr. PLC func. 12 47446 0h1D16 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.23 / US.23 23 LkOut13=0 Output link addr. PLC func. 13 47447 0h1D17 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.24 / US.24 24 LkOut14=0 Output link addr. PLC func. 14 47448 0h1D18 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.25 / US.25 25 LkOut15=0 Output link addr. PLC func. 15 47449 0h1D19 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.26 / US.26 26 LkOut16=0 Output link addr. PLC func. 16 47450 0h1D1A 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.27 / US.27 27 LkOut17=0 Output link addr. PLC func. 17 47451 0h1D1B 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.28 / US.28 28 LkOut18=0 Output link addr. PLC func. 18 47452 0h1D1C 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G11.31 / US.31 31 UFInp1=0 PLC input value 1 47455 0h1D1F -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.32 / US.32 32 UFInp2=0 PLC input value 2 47456 0h1D20 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.33 / US.33 33 UFInp3=0 PLC input value 3 47457 0h1D21 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.34 / US.34 34 UFInp4=0 PLC input value 4 47458 0h1D22 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.35 / US.35 35 UFInp5=0 PLC input value 5 47459 0h1D23 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.36 / US.36 36 UFInp6=0 PLC input value 6 47460 0h1D24 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.37 / US.37 37 UFInp7=0 PLC input value 7 47461 0h1D25 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.38 / US.38 38 UFInp8=0 PLC input value 8 47462 0h1D26 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.39 / US.39 39 UFInp9=0 PLC input value 9 47463 0h1D27 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.40 / US.40 40 UFInp10=0 PLC input value 10 47464 0h1D28 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.41 / US.41 41 UFInp11=0 PLC input value 11 47465 0h1D29 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.42 / US.42 42 UFInp12=0 PLC input value 12 47466 0h1D2A -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.43 / US.43 43 UFInp13=0 PLC input value 13 47467 0h1D2B -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.44 / US.44 44 UFInp14=0 PLC input value 14 47468 0h1D2C -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.45 / US.45 45 UFInp15=0 PLC input value 15 47469 0h1D2D -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.46 / US.46 46 UFInp16=0 PLC input value 16 47470 0h1D2E -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.47 / US.47 47 UFInp17=0 PLC input value 17 47471 0h1D2F -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.48 / US.48 48 UFInp18=0 PLC input value 18 47472 0h1D30 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.49 / US.49 49 UFInp19=0 PLC input value 19 47473 0h1D31 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.50 / US.50 50 UFInp20=0 PLC input value 20 47475 0h1D32 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999

90 MODBUS COMMUNICATION
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

Modbus Address
Parameter Screen Description Range Modbus Range
Decimal Hexadecimal
G11.51 / US.51 51 UFInp21=0 PLC input value 21 47475 0h1D33 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.52 / US.52 52 UFInp22=0 PLC input value 22 47476 0h1D34 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.53 / US.53 53 UFInp23=0 PLC input value 23 47477 0h1D35 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.54 / US.54 54 UFInp24=0 PLC input value 24 47478 0h1D36 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.55 / US.55 55 UFInp25=0 PLC input value 25 47479 0h1D37 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.56 / US.56 56 UFInp26=0 PLC input value 26 47480 0h1D38 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.57 / US.58 57 UFInp27=0 PLC input value 27 47481 0h1D39 -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.58 / US.58 58 UFInp28=0 PLC input value 28 47482 0h1D3A -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.59 / US.59 59 UFInp29=0 PLC input value 29 47483 0h1D3B -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.60 / US.60 60 UFInp30=0 PLC input value 30 47484 0h1D3C -9999 to 9999 -9999 to 9999
G11.80 / US.80 80 InV1=0.000 Analogue input V1 value 47504 0h1D50 0 to 12.000% 0 to 12000
G11.81 / US.81 81 InI1=+0.000 Analogue input I2 value 47505 0h1D51 -12.000 to 12.000% -12000 to 12000
G11.82 / US.82 82 DIValue=0 Digital inputs value 47506 0h1D52 0 to 127 0 to 127
G11.85 / US.85 85 AOVal=0.000 Analogue output value 47509 0h1D55 0.000 to 10.000% 0 to 10000
G11.88 / US.88 88 DOValue=0 Digital output value 47512 0h1D58 0 to 3 0 to 3
NOP 0
ADD 1
SUB 2
ADDSUB 3
MIN 4
MAX 5
ABS 6
NEGATE 7
MPYDIV 8
REMAINDER 9
COMPARE-GT 10
COMPARE-GEQ 11
COMPARE-EQUAL 12
COMPARE-NEQUAL 13
G12.1 / UF.1 1 Func1=NOP PLC function 1 47681 0h1E01 TIMER 14
LIMIT 15
AND 16
OR 17
XOR 18
ANDOR 19
SWITCH 20
BITTEST 21
BITSET 22
BITCLEAR 23
LOWPASSFILTER 24
PI_CONTORL 25
PI_PROCESS 26
UPCOUNT 27
DOWNCOUNT 28
G12.2 / UF.2 2 Inpt1A=0 Input A for PLC function 1 47682 0h1E02 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G12.3 / UF.3 3 Inpt1B=0 Input B for PLC function 1 47683 0h1E03 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G12.4 / UF.4 4 Inpt1C=0 Input C for PLC function 1 47684 0h1E04 0 to 65535 0 to 65535
G12.5 / UF.5 5 Outp1=+0 Output PLC function 1 47685 0h1E05 -32767 to 32767 -32767 to 32767
G12.6 / UF.6 6 Func2=NOP PLC function 2 47686 0h1E06 See G12.1 / UF.1 See G12.1 / UF.1
G12.7 / UF.7 7 Inpt2A=0 Input A for PLC function 2 47687 0h1E07 See G12.2 / UF.2 See G12.2 / UF.2
G12.8 / UF.8 8 Inpt2B=0 Input B for PLC function 2 47688 0h1E08 See G12.3 / UF.3 See G12.3 / UF.3
G12.9 / UF.9 9 Inpt2C=0 Input C for PLC function 2 47689 0h1E09 See G12.4 / UF.4 See G12.4 / UF.4
G12.10 / UF.10 10 Outp2=+0 Output PLC function 2 47690 0h1E0A See G12.5 / UF.5 See G12.5 / UF.5
G12.11 / UF.11 11 Func3=NOP PLC function 3 47691 0h1E0B See G12.1 / UF.1 See G12.1 / UF.1
G12.12 / UF.12 12 Inpt3A=0 Input A for PLC function 3 47692 0h1E0C See G12.2 / UF.2 See G12.2 / UF.2
G12.13 / UF.13 13 Inpt3B=0 Input B for PLC function 3 47693 0h1E0D See G12.3 / UF.3 See G12.3 / UF.3
G12.14 / UF.14 14 Inpt3C=0 Input C for PLC function 3 47694 0h1E0E See G12.4 / UF.4 See G12.4 / UF.4
G12.15 / UF.15 15 Outp3=+0 Output PLC function 3 47695 0h1E0F See G12.5 / UF.5 See G12.5 / UF.5
G12.16 / UF.16 16 Func4=NOP PLC function 4 47696 0h1E10 See G12.1 / UF.1 See G12.1 / UF.1
G12.17 / UF.17 17 Inpt4A=0 Input A for PLC function 4 47697 0h1E11 See G12.2 / UF.2 See G12.2 / UF.2
G12.18 / UF.18 18 Inpt4B=0 Input B for PLC function 4 47698 0h1E12 See G12.3 / UF.3 See G12.3 / UF.3
G12.19 / UF.19 19 Inpt4C=0 Input C for PLC function 4 47699 0h1E13 See G12.4 / UF.4 See G12.4 / UF.4
G12.20 / UF.20 20 Outp4=+0 Output PLC function 4 47700 0h1E14 See G12.5 / UF.5 See G12.5 / UF.5
G12.21 / UF.21 21 Func5=NOP PLC function 5 47701 0h1E15 See G12.1 / UF.1 See G12.1 / UF.1
G12.22 / UF.22 22 Inpt5A=0 Input A for PLC function 5 47702 0h1E16 See G12.2 / UF.2 See G12.2 / UF.2
G12.23 / UF.23 23 Inpt5B=0 Input B for PLC function 5 47703 0h1E17 See G12.3 / UF.3 See G12.3 / UF.3
G12.24 / UF.24 24 Inpt5C=0 Input C for PLC function 5 47704 0h1E18 See G12.4 / UF.4 See G12.4 / UF.4
G12.25 / UF.25 25 Outp5=+0 Output PLC function 5 47705 0h1E19 See G12.5 / UF.5 See G12.5 / UF.5
G12.26 / UF.26 26 Func6=NOP PLC function 6 47706 0h1E1A See G12.1 / UF.1 See G12.1 / UF.1
G12.27 / UF.27 27 Inpt6A=0 Input A for PLC function 6 47707 0h1E1B See G12.2 / UF.2 See G12.2 / UF.2
G12.28 / UF.28 28 Inpt6B=0 Input B for PLC function 6 47708 0h1E1C See G12.3 / UF.3 See G12.3 / UF.3

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 91
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

Modbus Address
Parameter Screen Description Range Modbus Range
Decimal Hexadecimal
G12.29 / UF.29 29 Inpt6C=0 Input C for PLC function 6 47709 0h1E1D See G12.4 / UF.4 See G12.4 / UF.4
G12.30 / UF.30 30 Outp6=+0 Output PLC function 6 47710 0h1E1E See G12.5 / UF.5 See G12.5 / UF.5
G12.31 / UF.31 31 Func7=NOP PLC function 7 47711 0h1E1F See G12.1 / UF.1 See G12.1 / UF.1
G12.32 / UF.32 32 Inpt7A=0 Input A for PLC function 7 47712 0h1E20 See G12.2 / UF.2 See G12.2 / UF.2
G12.33 / UF.33 33 Inpt7B=0 Input B for PLC function 7 47713 0h1E21 See G12.3 / UF.3 See G12.3 / UF.3
G12.34 / UF.34 34 Inpt7C=0 Input C for PLC function 7 47714 0h1E22 See G12.4 / UF.4 See G12.4 / UF.4
G12.35 / UF.35 35 Outp7=+0 Output PLC function 7 47715 0h1E23 See G12.5 / UF.5 See G12.5 / UF.5
G12.36 / UF.36 36 Func8=NOP PLC function 8 47716 0h1E24 See G12.1 / UF.1 See G12.1 / UF.1
G12.37 / UF.37 37 Inpt8A=0 Input A for PLC function 8 47717 0h1E25 See G12.2 / UF.2 See G12.2 / UF.2
G12.38 / UF.38 38 Inpt8B=0 Input B for PLC function 8 47718 0h1E26 See G12.3 / UF.3 See G12.3 / UF.3
G12.39 / UF.39 39 Inpt8C=0 Input C for PLC function 8 47719 0h1E27 See G12.4 / UF.4 See G12.4 / UF.4
G12.40 / UF.40 40 Outp8=+0 Output PLC function 8 47720 0h1E28 See G12.5 / UF.5 See G12.5 / UF.5
G12.41 / UF.41 41 Func9=NOP PLC function 9 47721 0h1E29 See G12.1 / UF.1 See G12.1 / UF.1
G12.42 / UF.42 42 Inpt9A=0 Input A for PLC function 9 47722 0h1E2A See G12.2 / UF.2 See G12.2 / UF.2
G12.43 / UF.43 43 Inpt9B=0 Input B for PLC function 9 47723 0h1E2B See G12.3 / UF.3 See G12.3 / UF.3
G12.44 / UF.44 44 Inpt9C=0 Input C for PLC function 9 47724 0h1E2C See G12.4 / UF.4 See G12.4 / UF.4
G12.45 / UF.45 45 Outp9=+0 Output PLC function 9 47725 0h1E2D See G12.5 / UF.5 See G12.5 / UF.5
G12.46 / UF.46 46 Func10=NOP PLC function 10 47726 0h1E2E See G12.1 / UF.1 See G12.1 / UF.1
G12.47 / UF.47 47 Inpt10A=0 Input A for PLC function 10 47727 0h1E2F See G12.2 / UF.2 See G12.2 / UF.2
G12.48 / UF.48 48 Inpt10B=0 Input B for PLC function 10 47728 0h1E30 See G12.3 / UF.3 See G12.3 / UF.3
G12.49 / UF.49 49 Inpt10C=0 Input C for PLC function 10 47729 0h1E31 See G12.4 / UF.4 See G12.4 / UF.4
G12.50 / UF.50 50 Outp10=+0 Output PLC function 10 47730 0h1E32 See G12.5 / UF.5 See G12.5 / UF.5
G12.51 / UF.51 51 Func11=NOP PLC function 11 47731 0h1E33 See G12.1 / UF.1 See G12.1 / UF.1
G12.52 / UF.52 52 Inpt11A=0 Input A for PLC function 11 47732 0h1E34 See G12.2 / UF.2 See G12.2 / UF.2
G12.53 / UF.53 53 Inpt11B=0 Input B for PLC function 11 47733 0h1E35 See G12.3 / UF.3 See G12.3 / UF.3
G12.54 / UF.54 54 Inpt11C=0 Input C for PLC function 11 47734 0h1E36 See G12.4 / UF.4 See G12.4 / UF.4
G12.55 / UF.55 55 Outp11=+0 Output PLC function 11 47735 0h1E37 See G12.5 / UF.5 See G12.5 / UF.5
G12.56 / UF.56 56 Func12=NOP PLC function 12 47736 0h1E38 See G12.1 / UF.1 See G12.1 / UF.1
G12.57 / UF.57 57 Inpt12A=0 Input A for PLC function 12 47737 0h1E39 See G12.2 / UF.2 See G12.2 / UF.2
G12.58 / UF.58 58 Inpt12B=0 Input B for PLC function 12 47738 0h1E3A See G12.3 / UF.3 See G12.3 / UF.3
G12.59 / UF.59 59 Inpt12C=0 Input C for PLC function 12 47739 0h1E3B See G12.4 / UF.4 See G12.4 / UF.4
G12.60 / UF.60 60 Outp12=+0 Output PLC function 12 47740 0h1E3C See G12.5 / UF.5 See G12.5 / UF.5
G12.61 / UF.61 61 Func13=NOP PLC function 13 47741 0h1E3D See G12.1 / UF.1 See G12.1 / UF.1
G12.62 / UF.62 62 Inpt13A=0 Input A for PLC function 13 47742 0h1E3E See G12.2 / UF.2 See G12.2 / UF.2
G12.63 / UF.63 63 Inpt13B=0 Input B for PLC function 13 47743 0h1E3F See G12.3 / UF.3 See G12.3 / UF.3
G12.64 / UF.64 64 Inpt13C=0 Input C for PLC function 13 47744 0h1E40 See G12.4 / UF.4 See G12.4 / UF.4
G12.65 / UF.65 65 Outp13=+0 Output PLC function 13 47745 0h1E41 See G12.5 / UF.5 See G12.5 / UF.5
G12.66 / UF.66 66 Func14=NOP PLC function 14 47746 0h1E42 See G12.1 / UF.1 See G12.1 / UF.1
G12.67 / UF.67 67 Inpt14A=0 Input A for PLC function 14 47747 0h1E43 See G12.2 / UF.2 See G12.2 / UF.2
G12.68 / UF.68 68 Inpt14B=0 Input B for PLC function 14 47748 0h1E44 See G12.3 / UF.3 See G12.3 / UF.3
G12.69 / UF.69 69 Inpt14C=0 Input C for PLC function 14 47749 0h1E45 See G12.4 / UF.4 See G12.4 / UF.4
G12.70 / UF.70 70 Outp14=+0 Output PLC function 14 47750 0h1E46 See G12.5 / UF.5 See G12.5 / UF.5
G12.71 / UF.71 71 Func15=NOP PLC function 15 47751 0h1E47 See G12.1 / UF.1 See G12.1 / UF.1
G12.72 / UF.72 72 Inpt15A=0 Input A for PLC function 15 47752 0h1E48 See G12.2 / UF.2 See G12.2 / UF.2
G12.73 / UF.73 73 Inpt15B=0 Input B for PLC function 15 47753 0h1E49 See G12.3 / UF.3 See G12.3 / UF.3
G12.74 / UF.74 74 Inpt15C=0 Input C for PLC function 15 47754 0h1E4A See G12.4 / UF.4 See G12.4 / UF.4
G12.75 / UF.75 75 Outp15=+0 Output PLC function 15 47755 0h1E4B See G12.5 / UF.5 See G12.5 / UF.5
G12.76 / UF.76 76 Func16=NOP PLC function 16 47756 0h1E4C See G12.1 / UF.1 See G12.1 / UF.1
G12.77 / UF.77 77 Inpt16A=0 Input A for PLC function 16 47757 0h1E4D See G12.2 / UF.2 See G12.2 / UF.2
G12.78 / UF.78 78 Inpt16B=0 Input B for PLC function 16 47758 0h1E4E See G12.3 / UF.3 See G12.3 / UF.3
G12.79 / UF.79 79 Inpt16C=0 Input C for PLC function 16 47759 0h1E4F See G12.4 / UF.4 See G12.4 / UF.4
G12.80 / UF.80 80 Outp16=+0 Output PLC function 16 47760 0h1E50 See G12.5 / UF.5 See G12.5 / UF.5
G12.81 / UF.81 81 Func17=NOP PLC function 17 47761 0h1E51 See G12.1 / UF.1 See G12.1 / UF.1
G12.82 / UF.82 82 Inpt17A=0 Input A for PLC function 17 47762 0h1E52 See G12.2 / UF.2 See G12.2 / UF.2
G12.83 / UF.83 83 Inpt17B=0 Input B for PLC function 17 47763 0h1E53 See G12.3 / UF.3 See G12.3 / UF.3
G12.84 / UF.84 84 Inpt17C=0 Input C for PLC function 17 47764 0h1E54 See G12.4 / UF.4 See G12.4 / UF.4
G12.85 / UF.85 85 Outp17=+0 Output PLC function 17 47765 0h1E55 See G12.5 / UF.5 See G12.5 / UF.5
G12.86 / UF.86 86 Func18=NOP PLC function 18 47766 0h1E56 See G12.1 / UF.1 See G12.1 / UF.1
G12.87 / UF.87 87 Inpt18A=0 Input A for PLC function 18 47767 0h1E57 See G12.2 / UF.2 See G12.2 / UF.2
G12.88 / UF.88 88 Inpt18B=0 Input B for PLC function 18 47768 0h1E58 See G12.3 / UF.3 See G12.3 / UF.3
G12.89 / UF.89 89 Inpt18C=0 Input C for PLC function 18 47769 0h1E59 See G12.4 / UF.4 See G12.4 / UF.4
G12.90 / UF.90 90 Outp18=+0 Output PLC function 18 47770 0h1E5A See G12.5 / UF.5 See G12.5 / UF.5

92 MODBUS COMMUNICATION
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

6.4.6. Visualization Parameters


Visualization parameters slightly differ depending on the display that is being used (integrated or
removable).

Modbus Address
Parameter Screen Description Modbus Range
Decimal Hexadecimal
SV1.1 Mtr Iout=0.0 Current running through the motor. 40784 0h0310 Real value = (Modbus value / 10)
SV1.2 Mtr Freq= 0.00Hz Motor frequency 40785 0h0311 Real value = (Modbus value / 100)
SV1.3 Mtr Sp= 0rpm Motor speed in rpm 40786 0h0312 Real value = Modbus value
Motor encoder speed (only shown if an encoder
SV1.4 Mtr FBSp=+0rpm 40787 0h0313 Real value = Modbus value
board has been installed).
SV1.5 Mtr Vout=0V Motor voltage 40788 0h0314 Real value = Modbus value
SV1.6 Mtr Pow = 0.00kW Motor instantaneous power consumption 40790 0h0316 Real value = (Modbus value / 100)
SV1.7 Mtr Torq = 0.0% Applied torque to the motor. 40791 0h0317 Real value = (Modbus value / 10)
SV2.1 Bus vol = 528V DC voltage measured in the drive bus. 40789 0h0315 Real value = Modbus value
SV2.2 Temperature = 27C Internal temperature of the drive. 44099 0h1003 Real value = Modbus value
SV3.1 ANLG IN V1 = +0.00V Voltage analog input 1 mean value. 45381 0h1505 Real value = (Modbus value / 100)
SV3.2 ANLG IN V2 = +0.00V Voltage analog input 2 mean value. 45411 0h1523 Real value = (Modbus value / 100)
SV3.3 ANLG IN I2 = +0.00mA Current analog input 2 mean value. 45426 0h1532 Real value = (Modbus value / 100)
SV3.4 DigI= 0000000 Activation or rest status of the Digital Inputs. 40016 0h0010 Real value = Modbus value
SV3.5 ANL OUT1 = 0.0% Analog output 1 value 45638 0h1606 Real value = (Modbus value / 10)
Status of the digital outputs in the following
SV3.6 DOstatus= 0-00 40017 0h0011 Real value = Modbus value
order: SD-Relay2 Relay1.
SV4.1 Inv.Power Drive power in kW. 40001 0h0001 Real value = Modbus value
Latest software version installed in the drive Ex.
SV4.2 Inv. S/W 40771 0h0303 Real value = Modbus value
0xE6 = v2.30.
SV4.3 SW Disp Latest software version installed in the display. - - -
PID set point value of the analog PID (left) and
S: 40792 C: 0h0318
SV5.1 S=0.0% F=0.0% the sensor value that sends the feedback signal Real value = (Modbus value / 10)
F: 40793 R: 0h0319
(right).
SV5.2 PID Out=+0.00% PID Output. 46160 0h1810 Real value = (Modbus value / 100)
Days: 40832 Days: 0h0340
SV6.1 Operating time Total runtime in days and minutes. Real value = Modbus value
Min.: 40833 Min.: 0h0341
MWh: Real value = Modbus value
MWh: 40815 MWh: 0h032F
SV6.2 Consumed Energy Total consumed energy, in MWh and kWh. kWh: Real value = (Modbus value /
kWh: 40814 kWh: 0h032E
10)

In the case of the integrated display, there is a specific group of parameters which summarize data
when a warning or fault occurs. These are:

Modbus Address
Parameter Description Modbus Range
Decimal Hexadecimal
Pr.90 Warning information 47003 0h1B5A
Pr.91 Fifth fault 47004 0h1B5B
Pr.92 Fourth fault 47005 0h1B5C See fault descriptions and codes in
sections 3.2.1, 5.9, and at the
Pr.93 Third fault 46917 0h1B04 beginning of this section (6.5.2).
Pr.94 Second fault 46918 0h1B05
Pr.95 First fault 46919 0h1B06
Pr.96 Delete fault history 46920 0h1B07 0 to 1

MODBUS COMMUNICATION 93
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

7. CONFIGURATION REGISTER
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE: SD300.
SERIAL N: MODEL:
APPLICATION:
DATE:
CUSTOMER:
NOTES:

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


G1 (dr): Drive
1 LCLSP=0.00Hz 0.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
2 LclTQ=0.0% 0.0%
___________________ ___________________
3 ACC1=20.0s 20.0s
___________________ ___________________
4 DECEL1=30.0s 30.0s
___________________ ___________________
6 CONTROLMODE1=REMOTE REMOTE
___________________ ___________________
7 REF1 SP= LOCAL LOCAL
___________________ ___________________
8 REF1 TQ= LOCAL LOCAL
___________________ ___________________
9 Ctr.T=V/Hz V/Hz
___________________ ___________________
10 Torq CTRL=N N
___________________ ___________________
11 InchF=10.00Hz 10.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
12 InchAcT=20.0s 20.0s
___________________ ___________________
13 InchDeT=30.0s 30.0s
___________________ ___________________

94
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


14 MTRPWR= (*) _._kW
___________________ ___________________
15 TqBoost=Manual Manual
___________________ ___________________
16 FWBoost=2.0% 2.0%
___________________ ___________________
17 RVBoost=2.0% 2.0%
___________________ ___________________
18MTRFRQ=60.00Hz 60.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
19 STRFRQ=0.5Hz 0.5Hz
___________________ ___________________
20 MxSpL=60.00Hz 60.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
21 Hz/Rpm=Hz Hz
___________________ ___________________
80 SelRngEnt=Run Freq. Run Freq.
___________________ ___________________
81 SelCod=Volt V Volt V
___________________ ___________________
89 DspChng=All All
___________________ ___________________
90 ESC Func= Mov. In. Pos. Mov. In. Pos.
___________________ ___________________
91 Eloader=None None
___________________ ___________________
93 INITIALIS=No No
___________________ ___________________
94 PswRg=0 0
___________________ ___________________
95 PrmLock=0 0
___________________ ___________________
97 SoftVer=0 0
___________________ ___________________
98 IOSwVer=0 0
___________________ ___________________
99 IOHwVer=0 0
___________________ ___________________
G2 (bA): Basic Functions
1 REF2 SP=None None
___________________ ___________________
2 AuxCalcType=M+(G*A) M+(G*A)
___________________ ___________________
3 AuxRfG=100.0% 100.0%
___________________ ___________________
4 CONTROLMODE2=REMOTE REMOTE
___________________ ___________________
5 REF2 SP=LOCAL LOCAL
___________________ ___________________
6 REF2 TQ= LOCAL LOCAL
___________________ ___________________
7 V/FPn=Linear Linear
___________________ ___________________
8 RmpT= MaxFreq MaxFreq
___________________ ___________________
9 TimScl=0.1s 0.1s
___________________ ___________________
10 I/P Freq=60Hz 60Hz
___________________ ___________________
11 POLE Numbr=4 4
___________________ ___________________
12 RtSlp=40rpm 40rpm
___________________ ___________________
13 MTRCUR=3.6A 3.6A
___________________ ___________________
14 NOLODC=1.6A 1.6A
___________________ ___________________

* This value depends on the motor setting

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 95
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


15 MTR VOLT=0V 0V
___________________ ___________________
16 EFFICIEN=72% 72%
___________________ ___________________
17 InertiaRate=0 0
___________________ ___________________
18 TrimPwr%=100% 100%
___________________ ___________________
220V220
19 ACi/Volt=220V / 380V
440V380 ___________________ ___________________
20 AutoTuning=None None
___________________ ___________________
21 Rs=0 (*) 0
___________________ ___________________
22 LSigma=0mH __mH
___________________ ___________________
23 Ls=0mH __mH
___________________ ___________________
24 Tr=145ms 145ms
___________________ ___________________
25 Ls Scl=100% 100%
___________________ ___________________
26 Tr Scl=100% 100%
___________________ ___________________
31 LsR Scl=80% 80%
___________________ ___________________
41 UsFq1=15.00Hz 15.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
42 User V1=25% 25%
___________________ ___________________
43 UsFq2=30.00Hz 30.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
44 User V2=50% 50%
___________________ ___________________
45 UsFq3=45.00Hz 45.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
46 User I2=75% 75%
___________________ ___________________
47 UsFrq4=0.00Hz 0.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
48 User V4=0% 0%
___________________ ___________________
50 MREF1=10.00% 10.00%
___________________ ___________________
51 MREF2=20.00% 20.00%
___________________ ___________________
52 MREF3=30.00% 30.00%
___________________ ___________________
53 MREF4=40.00% 40.00%
___________________ ___________________
54 MREF5=50.00% 50.00%
___________________ ___________________
55 MREF6=60.00% 60.00%
___________________ ___________________
56 MREF7=60.00% 60.00%
___________________ ___________________
70 ACC2=20.0s 20.0s
___________________ ___________________
71 DEC2=30.0s 30.0s
___________________ ___________________
72 ACC3=20.0s 20.0s
___________________ ___________________
73 DEC3=30.0s 30.0s
___________________ ___________________
74 ACC4=20.0s 20.0s
___________________ ___________________
75 DEC4=30.0s 30.0s
___________________ ___________________

96
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


76 ACC5=20.0s 20.0s
___________________ ___________________
77 DEC5=30.0s 30.0s
___________________ ___________________
78 ACC6=20.0s 20.0s
___________________ ___________________
79 DEC6=30.0s 30.0s
___________________ ___________________
80 ACC7=20.0s 20.0s
___________________ ___________________
81 DEC7=30.0s 30.0s
___________________ ___________________
82 ACC8=20.0s 20.0s
___________________ ___________________
83 DEC8=30.0s 30.0s
___________________ ___________________
G3 (Ad): Expanded Functions
1 AccPn=Linear Linear
___________________ ___________________
2 DecPn=Linear Linear
___________________ ___________________
3 AccSSrt=40% 40%
___________________ ___________________
4 AccSEnd=40% 40%
___________________ ___________________
5 DecSSrt=40% 40%
___________________ ___________________
6 DecSEnd=40% 40%
___________________ ___________________
7 START=RAMP RAMP
___________________ ___________________
8 STOP=RAMP RAMP
___________________ ___________________
9 FWR/RV=None None
___________________ ___________________
10 Run Aft VlF=N N
___________________ ___________________
12 DCSt T=0.00s 0.00s
___________________ ___________________
13 DC Curr=50% 50%
___________________ ___________________
14 PreDCT=0.10s 0.10s
___________________ ___________________
15 DCBrkT=1.00s 1.00s
___________________ ___________________
16 DCBkCur=50% 50%
___________________ ___________________
17 DCBkF=5.00Hz 5.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
20 AcDF=5.00Hz 5.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
21 AccDWT=0.0s 0.0s
___________________ ___________________
22 DeDF=5.00Hz 5.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
23 DecDWT=0.0s 0.0s
___________________ ___________________
24 UseFrqLimit=N N
___________________ ___________________
25 FLtLo=0.50Hz 0.50Hz
___________________ ___________________
26 FLtHi=[G1.20]/dr.20Hz [G1.20]/dr.20Hz
___________________ ___________________
27 Jump Freq=N N
___________________ ___________________
28 JmpL1=10.00Hz 10.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
29 JmpH1=15.00Hz 15.00Hz
___________________ ___________________

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 97
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


30 JmpL2=20.00Hz 20.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
31 JmpH2=25.00Hz 25.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
32 JmpL3=30.00Hz 30.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
33 JmpH3=35.00Hz 35.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
41 RlsCur=50.0% 50.0%
___________________ ___________________
42 RlsDly=1.00s 1.00s
___________________ ___________________
44 FwdFq=1.00Hz 1.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
45 RevFq=1.00Hz 1.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
46 BEngDly=1.00s 1.00s
___________________ ___________________
47 BEngF=2.00Hz 2.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
50 FLX MIN=NONE NONE
___________________ ___________________
51 FluxLVEL=0% 0%
___________________ ___________________
60 XclCF=0.00Hz 0.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
64 FAN=During Run During Run
___________________ ___________________
65 SaveMot Frq=N N
___________________ ___________________
66 SLCOM=None None
___________________ ___________________
67 ScON=90.00% 90.00%
___________________ ___________________
68 SC OF=10.00% 10.00%
___________________ ___________________
70 RunEMod=Always Enable Always Enable
___________________ ___________________
71 RunDStp=Free Run Free Run
___________________ ___________________
72 QStpT=5.0s 5.0s
___________________ ___________________
74 RegAvdSel=N N
___________________ ___________________
75 VlRegL=700V 700V
___________________ ___________________
76 CpFrL=1.00Hz 1.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
77 RegAvP=50.0% 50.0%
___________________ ___________________
78 RgAvI=50.0ms 50.0ms
___________________ ___________________
80 FireModSel=None None
___________________ ___________________
81 FMdFr=60.00Hz 60.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
82 FModD=Forward Forward
___________________ ___________________
G4 (Cn): Control Functions
4 FREQ=2.0 / 3.0kHz 2.0 / 3.0kHz
___________________ ___________________
5 PWM=Normal PWM Normal PWM
___________________ ___________________
9 PreExT=1.00s 1.00s
___________________ ___________________
10 PreExF=100.0% 100.0%
___________________ ___________________
11 PwofDl=0.00s 0.00s
___________________ ___________________

98
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


20 SL2GaViSel=N N
___________________ ___________________
21 ASR P1=500% ___%
___________________ ___________________
22 ASR I1=300ms ___ms
___________________ ___________________
23 ASR P2=120.0% ___._%
___________________ ___________________
24 ASR I2=30.0% ___._%
___________________ ___________________
25 ASR I1=300ms ___ms
___________________ ___________________
26 P Flux=50% __%
___________________ ___________________
27 I Flux=50% __%
___________________ ___________________
28 SpEsP1=100 ___
___________________ ___________________
29 SpEsI1=500 ___
___________________ ___________________
30 SpEsI2=2000 ___
___________________ ___________________
31 ACR P2=500 ___
___________________ ___________________
32 ACR I2=500 ___
___________________ ___________________
48 ACR P1=1200 1200
___________________ ___________________
49 ACR I1=120 120
___________________ ___________________
52 OuFVec=0ms 0ms
___________________ ___________________
53 TqLimRef=LOCAL LOCAL
___________________ ___________________
54 TLpsFW=180.0% 180.0%
___________________ ___________________
55 TLngFW=180.0% 180.0%
___________________ ___________________
56 TLpsRV=180.0% 180.0%
___________________ ___________________
57 TLngRV=180.0% 180.0%
___________________ ___________________
62 SpLiRf=LOCAL LOCAL
___________________ ___________________
63 SpL(+)=50.00Hz 50.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
64 SpL(-)=50.00Hz 50.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
65 SpLGa=500% 500%
___________________ ___________________
70 SSMode=Flying Start1 Flying Start1
___________________ ___________________
71 Srch Mod=0000 0000
___________________ ___________________
72 Srch I=150% 150%
___________________ ___________________
73 Kp Srch=100/600 100/600
___________________ ___________________
74 Ki Srch=100/600 100/600
___________________ ___________________
75 SrchDly=1.0s 1.0s
___________________ ___________________
76 SpEsGa=100% 100%
___________________ ___________________
77 KEB Sel=No No
___________________ ___________________
78 KEBStr=125.0% 125.0%
___________________ ___________________

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 99
SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


79 KEBStp=130.0% 130.0%
___________________ ___________________
80 KEBPGn=10000 10000
___________________ ___________________
81 KEBIGn=500 500
___________________ ___________________
85 FlxPrGa1=370 370
___________________ ___________________
86 FlxPrGa2=0 0
___________________ ___________________
87 FlxPrGa3=100 100
___________________ ___________________
88 FlxInGa1=50 50
___________________ ___________________
89 FlxInGa2=50 50
___________________ ___________________
___
90 FlxInGa3=50
___________________ ___________________
___
91 SLVoCmp1=20
___________________ ___________________
___
92 SLVoCmp2=20
___________________ ___________________
93 SLVoCmp3=20 20
___________________ ___________________
94 FWFrS=100.0% 100.0%
___________________ ___________________
95 FcFrS= 2.00Hz 2.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
G5 (In): Inputs
1 MxFA=[G1.20]/dr.20Hz [G1.20]/dr.20Hz
___________________ ___________________
2 MaxTrq=100.0% 100.0%
___________________ ___________________
5 AnlgIN1=0.00V 0.00V
___________________ ___________________
6 An1PT=0-10V 0-10V
___________________ ___________________
7 Ain1LP=10ms 10ms
___________________ ___________________
8 A1MnV=0.00V 0.00V
___________________ ___________________
9 A1MnR=0.00% 0.00%
___________________ ___________________
10 An1MxV=10.00V 10.00V
___________________ ___________________
11 A1MxR=10.00% 10.00%
___________________ ___________________
12 A1NMn=-10.00V -10.00V
___________________ ___________________
13 A1MnR=-10.00% -10.00%
___________________ ___________________
14 A1MxV=-10.00V -10.00V
___________________ ___________________
15 A1Mx=-10.00% -10.00%
___________________ ___________________
16 V1 Invert=N N
___________________ ___________________
17 A1DeLl=0.04% 0.04%
___________________ ___________________
35 AngIN2=0.00V 0.00V
___________________ ___________________
37 A2LPF=10ms 10ms
___________________ ___________________
38 A2MnC=0.00V 0.00V
___________________ ___________________
39 A2MnR=0.00% 0.00%
___________________ ___________________
40 A2MxC=10.00V 10.00V
___________________ ___________________

100
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


41 A2MxR=100.00% 100.00%
___________________ ___________________
46 V2 Invert=N N
___________________ ___________________
47 A2DeLl=0.04% 0.04%
___________________ ___________________
50 AnI2=0.00mA 0.00mA
___________________ ___________________
52 AI2LF=10ms 10ms
___________________ ___________________
53 A3MnC=4.00mA 4.00mA
___________________ ___________________
54 A3MnR=0.00% 0.00%
___________________ ___________________
55 A2MxC=10.00mA 10.00mA
___________________ ___________________
56 A2MxR=100.00% 100.00%
___________________ ___________________
61 I2 Invert=N N
___________________ ___________________
62 A2DeLl=0.04% 0.04%
___________________ ___________________
65 DI1=START(+) 1
___________________ ___________________
66 DI2= START(-) 2
___________________ ___________________
67 DI3=RESET 3
___________________ ___________________
68 DI4=RESET 3
___________________ ___________________
69 DI5=SPEED-L 7
___________________ ___________________
70 DI6=SPEED-M 8
___________________ ___________________
71 DI7=SPEED-H 9
___________________ ___________________
85 DIOnF=10ms 10ms
___________________ ___________________
86 DIOfF=3ms 3ms
___________________ ___________________
87 DCTy=0000 0000
___________________ ___________________
89 DiScan=1ms 1ms
___________________ ___________________
90 StDI=0000 0000
___________________ ___________________
91 TIPls=0.00kHz 0.00kHz
___________________ ___________________
92 TIFlt=400ms 400ms
___________________ ___________________
93 TIMn=0.00kHz 0.00kHz
___________________ ___________________
94 TIMnR=0.00% 0.00%
___________________ ___________________
95 TIMx=32.00kHz 32.00kHz
___________________ ___________________
96 TIMxR=100.00% 100.00%
___________________ ___________________
97 TI Invert=N N
___________________ ___________________
98 TIDeLl=0.04% 0.04%
___________________ ___________________
99 IOSWST=0.0Bit 00
___________________ ___________________
G6 (OU): Outputs
1 AO1=Frequency Frequency
___________________ ___________________
2 AO1Ga=100.0% 100.0%
___________________ ___________________

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 101


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


3 AO1Ofs=0.0% 0.0%
___________________ ___________________
4 AO1Fil=5ms 5ms
___________________ ___________________
5 AO1Con=0.0% 0.0%
___________________ ___________________
6 ANOUT1=0.0% 0.0%
___________________ ___________________
30 OP FLT RLY=010 010
___________________ ___________________
31 RLY1=Trip Trip
___________________ ___________________
33 DOP1=Run Run
___________________ ___________________
41 DO Sts=00 00
___________________ ___________________
50 TRLON=0.00s 0.00s
___________________ ___________________
51 TRLOF=0.00s 0.00s
___________________ ___________________
52 INV YES/NC=00 00
___________________ ___________________
53 TOnDl=0.00s 0.00s
___________________ ___________________
54 TOfDl=0.00s 0.00s
___________________ ___________________
55 TiOnD=0.00s 0.00s
___________________ ___________________
56 TOfDl=0.00s 0.00s
___________________ ___________________
57 FDTLv=30.00Hz 30.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
58 FDTBd=10.00Hz 10.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
61 TOM=Frequency Frequency
___________________ ___________________
62 TOGa=100.0% 100.0%
___________________ ___________________
63 TOOfs=0.0% 0.0%
___________________ ___________________
64 TOFil=5ms 5ms
___________________ ___________________
65 TOCon=0.0% 0.0%
___________________ ___________________
66 TO=0.0% 0.0%
___________________ ___________________
G7 (CM): Communications
1 Slave Addr=1 1
___________________ ___________________
2 Prot=Modbus Modbus
___________________ ___________________
3 BaudR=9600bps 9600bps
___________________ ___________________
4 Mode=D8/PN/S1 D8/PN/S1
___________________ ___________________
5 RespDly=5ms 5ms
___________________ ___________________
CM.6 0.00
___________________ ___________________
CM.7 1
___________________ ___________________
CM.8 12Mbps
___________________ ___________________
CM.9 -
___________________ ___________________
CM.30 3
___________________ ___________________
CM.31 000A
___________________ ___________________

102
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


CM.32 000E
___________________ ___________________
CM.33 000F
___________________ ___________________
CM.34 0000
___________________ ___________________
CM.35 0000
___________________ ___________________
CM.36 0000
___________________ ___________________
CM.37 0000
___________________ ___________________
CM.38 0000
___________________ ___________________
CM.50 2
___________________ ___________________
CM.51 0005
___________________ ___________________
CM.52 0006
___________________ ___________________
CM.53 0000
___________________ ___________________
CM.54 0000
___________________ ___________________
CM.55 0000
___________________ ___________________
CM.56 0000
___________________ ___________________
CM.57 0000
___________________ ___________________
CM.58 0000
___________________ ___________________
CM.68 0
___________________ ___________________
CM.70 None
___________________ ___________________
CM.71 None
___________________ ___________________
CM.72 None
___________________ ___________________
CM.73 None
___________________ ___________________
CM.74 None
___________________ ___________________
CM.75 None
___________________ ___________________
CM.76 None
___________________ ___________________
CM.77 None
___________________ ___________________
CM.86 0
___________________ ___________________
CM.90 0
___________________ ___________________
CM.91 0
___________________ ___________________
CM.92 0
___________________ ___________________
CM.93 0
___________________ ___________________
94 ActualCom=N NO
___________________ ___________________
CM.95 Disable all
___________________ ___________________
CM.96 0
___________________ ___________________
G8 (AP): PID
1 ApMod=Proc PID Proc PID
___________________ ___________________

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 103


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


2 UsSeqEn=N N
___________________ ___________________
16 PIDOut=+0.0% +0.0%
___________________ ___________________
17 PIDRef=+50.00% +50.00%
___________________ ___________________
18 PIDFdb=+0.00% +0.00%
___________________ ___________________
19 PIDLo=+50.00% +50.00%
___________________ ___________________
20 SELREF=MREF MREF
___________________ ___________________
21 SELFBK=V1 V1
___________________ ___________________
22 GANKp=+50.00% +50.00%
___________________ ___________________
23 INTEGRL=10.0ms 10.0ms
___________________ ___________________
24 DIFFE=0ms 0ms
___________________ ___________________
25 GAINF=+0.0% +0.0%
___________________ ___________________
26 PGaSca=100.0% 100.0%
___________________ ___________________
27 PIDFl=0ms 0ms
___________________ ___________________
28 PIDMd=Process Process
___________________ ___________________
29 MxSL=+60.00Hz +60.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
30 MnSL=-60.00Hz -60.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
31 INVERT PID=N N
___________________ ___________________
32 OutSc=+100.00% +100.00%
___________________ ___________________
34 PPIDR=0.00Hz 0.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
35 PPIDE=0.0% 0.0%
___________________ ___________________
36 PPIDTim=600s 600s
___________________ ___________________
37 LPTSlp=60.0s 60.0s
___________________ ___________________
38 SlpSp=0.00Hz 0.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
39 LPPon=+35% +35%
___________________ ___________________
40 WkUPID=Below Below
___________________ ___________________
42 PIDUn=% %
___________________ ___________________
43 PIDuG=100.00% 100.00%
___________________ ___________________
44 PIDUnSc=x1 x1
___________________ ___________________
45 GaKp2=100.0% 100.0%
___________________ ___________________
G9 (Pr): Protections
4 Load Duty=Hevy Hevy
___________________ ___________________
5 LSS PH=NONE NONE
___________________ ___________________
6 Ripple V=15V 15V
___________________ ___________________
7 FlDecT=3.0s 3.0s
___________________ ___________________
8 Str Aft Rst=N N
___________________ ___________________

104
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


9 Retry Num=0 0
___________________ ___________________
10 RetryDly=1.0s 1.0s
___________________ ___________________
12 RIRLs=None None
___________________ ___________________
13 RfLsDl=1.0s 1.0s
___________________ ___________________
14 RfLRf=0.00Hz 0.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
15 AILL=Half Half
___________________ ___________________
17 OlWarnSel=YES YES
___________________ ___________________
18 OLWrnL=+150% +150%
___________________ ___________________
19 OLWrnT=10.0s 10.0s
___________________ ___________________
20 OLTS=Freerun Freerun
___________________ ___________________
21 OLLevel=180% 180%
___________________ ___________________
22 OLTrpT=60.0s 60.0s
___________________ ___________________
25 EnableUL=YES YES
___________________ ___________________
26 ULWnDl=10.0s 10.0s
___________________ ___________________
27 ULFM=None None
___________________ ___________________
28 ULFlDl=30.0 30.0
___________________ ___________________
29 UlMnL=+30% +30%
___________________ ___________________
30 ULMxL=+30% +30%
___________________ ___________________
31 NoMD=None None
___________________ ___________________
32 NoMtrLv=+5% +5%
___________________ ___________________
33 NoMtrDl=3.0s 3.0s
___________________ ___________________
40 ThMM=None None
___________________ ___________________
41 MTCOOL=SELF SELF
___________________ ___________________
42 ETH1min=150% 150%
___________________ ___________________
43 ETHcont=+120% +120%
___________________ ___________________
45 BSMod=FreeRun FreeRun
___________________ ___________________
50 StallPR=00 00
___________________ ___________________
51 StFr1=60Hz 60Hz
___________________ ___________________
52 StlLev1=180% 180%
___________________ ___________________
53 StFr2=60Hz 60Hz
___________________ ___________________
54 StlLev2=180% 180%
___________________ ___________________
55 StFr3=60Hz 60Hz
___________________ ___________________
56 StlLev3=180% 180%
___________________ ___________________
57 StFr4=60Hz 60Hz
___________________ ___________________

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 105


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


58 StlLev4=180% 180%
___________________ ___________________
59 FB Kp=0% 0%
___________________ ___________________
60 CAPDgLV=0% 0%
___________________ ___________________
61 CAPDg=+0% +0%
___________________ ___________________
62 CAPExLv=0% 0%
___________________ ___________________
63 CAPDgL=0.0% 0.0%
___________________ ___________________
66 DBWarnED=+0% +0%
___________________ ___________________
73 SpdDev=N N
___________________ ___________________
74 SpdDevLv=50 50
___________________ ___________________
75 SpdDevTi=60 60
___________________ ___________________
79 FANTrip=Warn Warn
___________________ ___________________
80 TrpMd=FreeRun FreeRun
___________________ ___________________
81 LVT Dly=0.0s 0.0s
___________________ ___________________
82 LV2 On=YES YES
___________________ ___________________
86 FanTi=0% 0%
___________________ ___________________
87 FanELv=90.0% 90.0%
___________________ ___________________
88 FanTiRst=N N
___________________ ___________________
89 CAP FAN St=0 0
___________________ ___________________
G10 (M2): Second Motor
4 AccTi=20.0s 20.0s
___________________ ___________________
5 DECEL=30.0s 30.0s
___________________ ___________________
6 MTR2PWR=4.0kW 4.0kW
___________________ ___________________
7 MTRFRQ=60.00Hz 60.00Hz
___________________ ___________________
8 Ctr. T=V/Hz V/Hz
___________________ ___________________
10 POLE Numbr=4 __
___________________ ___________________
11 RtSlp=64rpm __rpm
___________________ ___________________
12 MTRCUR=8.6A _._A
___________________ ___________________
13 NOLODC=3.1A _._A
___________________ ___________________
14 MTR VOLT=0V __V
___________________ ___________________
15 EFFICIEN=+84% ___%
___________________ ___________________
16 InertiaRate=0 __
___________________ ___________________
17 Rs=138.8m ___m
___________________ ___________________
18 LSigma=1.244m _.___m
___________________ ___________________
19 Ls=16.45mH __.__mH
___________________ ___________________
20 Tr=228ms ___ms
___________________ ___________________

106
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


25 V/FPn=Linear Linear
___________________ ___________________
26 FWBoost=+2.0% +2.0%
___________________ ___________________
27 RVBoost=+2.0% +2.0%
___________________ ___________________
28 StlLev1=150% 150%
___________________ ___________________
29 ETH1min=+150% +150%
___________________ ___________________
30 ETHcont=+100% +100%
___________________ ___________________
G11 (US): PLC Sequence
1 OpComm=Stop Stop
___________________ ___________________
2 LoopTime=0.02s 0.02s
___________________ ___________________
11 LkOut1=0 0
___________________ ___________________
12 LkOut2=0 0
___________________ ___________________
13 LkOut3=0 0
___________________ ___________________
14 LkOut4=0 0
___________________ ___________________
15 LkOut5=0 0
___________________ ___________________
16 LkOut6=0 0
___________________ ___________________
17 LkOut7=0 0
___________________ ___________________
18 LkOut8=0 0
___________________ ___________________
19 LkOut9=0 0
___________________ ___________________
20 LkOut10=0 0
___________________ ___________________
21 LkOut11=0 0
___________________ ___________________
22 LkOut12=0 0
___________________ ___________________
23 LkOut13=0 0
___________________ ___________________
24 LkOut14=0 0
___________________ ___________________
25 LkOut15=0 0
___________________ ___________________
26 LkOut16=0 0
___________________ ___________________
27 LkOut17=0 0
___________________ ___________________
28 LkOut18=0 0
___________________ ___________________
31 UFInp1=0 0
___________________ ___________________
32 UFInp2=0 0
___________________ ___________________
33 UFInp3=0 0
___________________ ___________________
0
34 UFInp4=0
___________________ ___________________
0
35 UFInp5=0
___________________ ___________________
0
36 UFInp6=0
___________________ ___________________
0
37 UFInp7=0
___________________ ___________________
0
38 UFInp8=0
___________________ ___________________

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 107


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


0
39 UFInp9=0
___________________ ___________________
0
40 UFInp10=0
___________________ ___________________
0
41 UFInp11=0
___________________ ___________________
0
42 UFInp12=0
___________________ ___________________
0
43 UFInp13=0
___________________ ___________________
0
44 UFInp14=0
___________________ ___________________
0
45 UFInp15=0
___________________ ___________________
0
46 UFInp16=0
___________________ ___________________
0
47 UFInp17=0
___________________ ___________________
0
48 UFInp18=0
___________________ ___________________
0
49 UFInp19=0
___________________ ___________________
0
50 UFInp20=0
___________________ ___________________
0
51 UFInp21=0
___________________ ___________________
0
52 UFInp22=0
___________________ ___________________
0
53 UFInp23=0
___________________ ___________________
0
54 UFInp24=0
___________________ ___________________
0
55 UFInp25=0
___________________ ___________________
0
56 UFInp26=0
___________________ ___________________
0
57 UFInp27=0
___________________ ___________________
0
58 UFInp28=0
___________________ ___________________
0
59 UFInp29=0
___________________ ___________________
0
60 UFInp30=0
___________________ ___________________
80 InV1=0.000 0.000
___________________ ___________________
81 InI1=+0.000 +0.000
___________________ ___________________
82 DIValue=0 0
___________________ ___________________
85 AOVal= -
___________________ ___________________
88 DOValue=0 0
___________________ ___________________
G12 (UF): PLC Function
1 Func1=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________
2 Inpt1A=0 0
___________________ ___________________
3 Inpt1B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
4 Inpt1C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
5 Outp1=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________
6 Func2=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________
7 Inpt2A=0 0
___________________ ___________________

108
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


8 Inpt2B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
9 Inpt2C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
10 Outp2=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________
11 Func3=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________
12 Inpt3A=0 0
___________________ ___________________
13 Inpt3B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
14 Inpt3C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
15 Outp3=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________
16 Func4=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________
17 Inpt4A=0 0
___________________ ___________________
18 Inpt4B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
19 Inpt4C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
20 Outp4=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________
21 Func5=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________
22 Inpt5A=0 0
___________________ ___________________
23 Inpt5B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
24 Inpt5C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
25 Outp5=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________
26 Func6=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________
27 Inpt6A=0 0
___________________ ___________________
28 Inpt6B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
29 Inpt6C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
30 Outp6=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________
31 Func7=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________
32 Inpt7A=0 0
___________________ ___________________
33 Inpt7B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
34 Inpt7C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
35 Outp7=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________
36 Func8=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________
37 Inpt8A=0 0
___________________ ___________________
38 Inpt8B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
39 Inpt8C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
40 Outp8=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________
41 Func9=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 109


SD300 SERIES POWER ELECTRONICS

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


42 Inpt9A=0 0
___________________ ___________________
43 Inpt9B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
44 Inpt9C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
45 Outp9=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________
46 Func10=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________
47 Inpt10A=0 0
___________________ ___________________
48 Inpt10B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
49 Inpt10C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
50 Outp10=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________
51 Func11=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________
52 Inpt11A=0 0
___________________ ___________________
53 Inpt11B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
54 Inpt11C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
55 Outp11=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________
56 Func12=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________
57 Inpt12A=0 0
___________________ ___________________
58 Inpt12B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
59 Inpt12C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
60 Outp12=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________
61 Func13=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________
62 Inpt13A=0 0
___________________ ___________________
63 Inpt13B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
64 Inpt13C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
65 Outp13=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________
66 Func14=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________
67 Inpt14A=0 0
___________________ ___________________
68 Inpt14B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
69 Inpt14C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
70 Outp14=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________
71 Func15=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________
72 Inpt15A=0 0
___________________ ___________________
73 Inpt15B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
74 Inpt15C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
75 Outp15=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________

110
POWER ELECTRONICS SD300 SERIES

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE SETTING 1 SETTING 2


76 Func16=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________
77 Inpt16A=0 0
___________________ ___________________
78 Inpt16B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
79 Inpt16C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
80 Outp16=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________
81 Func17=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________
82 Inpt17A=0 0
___________________ ___________________
83 Inpt17B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
84 Inpt17C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
85 Outp17=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________
86 Func18=NOP NOP
___________________ ___________________
87 Inpt18A=0 0
___________________ ___________________
88 Inpt18B=0 0
___________________ ___________________
89 Inpt18C=0 0
___________________ ___________________
90 Outp18=+0 +0
___________________ ___________________

CONFIGURATION REGISTER 111


www.powerelectronics.es | www.power-electronics.com
24h Technical Assistance 365 days a year 902 402 070 / +34 961 366 557
HEADQUARTERS VALENCIA SPAIN
C/ Leonardo da Vinci, 24 26 Parque Tecnolgico 46980 PATERNA VALENCIA ESPAA
Tel. 902 40 20 70 (Spain) Tel. (+34) 96 136 65 57 Fax (+34) 96 131 82 01
BRANCHES
BARCELONA Avda. de la Ferrera, 86-88 08110 MONTCADA I REIXAC
Tel. (+34) 96 136 65 57 Fax (+34) 93 564 47 52
CATALONIA
LLEIDA C/ Terrasa, 13 Bajo 25005 LLEIDA
Tel. (+34) 97 372 59 52 Fax (+34) 97 372 59 52
CANARY LAS PALMAS C/ Juan de la Cierva, 4 35200 TELDE
ISLANDS Tel. (+34) 928 68 26 47 Fax (+34) 928 68 26 47
CASTELLN C/ Juan Bautista Poeta 2 Piso Puerta 4 12006 CASTELLN
Tel. (+34) 96 136 65 57
LEVANTE
MURCIA Pol. Residencial Santa Ana Avda. Venecia, 17 30319 CARTAGENA
Tel. (+34) 96 853 51 94 Fax (+34) 96 812 66 23
VIZCAYA Parque de Actividades Empresariales Asuarn Edificio Asa, 1 B Ctra. Bilbao
NORTH
Plencia 48950 ERANDIO Tel. (+34) 96 136 65 57 Fax (+34) 94 431 79 08
MADRID Avda. Rey Juan Carlos I, 98, 4 C 28916 LEGANS
CENTRE
Tel. (+34) 96 136 65 57 Fax (+34) 91 687 53 84
SEVILLA C/Arquitectura, Bloque 6 Planta 5 Mdulo 2 Parque Empresarial Nuevo Torneo
SOUTH
41015 SEVILLA Tel. (+34) 95 451 57 73 Fax (+34) 95 451 57 73
INTERNATIONAL SUBSIDIARIES
Power Electronics Australia Pty Ltd U6, 30-34 Octal St, Yatala, - Brisbane, Queensland 4207
AUSTRALIA P.O. Box 3166, Browns Plains, Queensland 4118
Tel. (+61) 7 3386 1993 Fax (+61) 7 3386 1993 Email: sales@power-electronics.com.au
Power Electronics Brazil Ltda Domo Business - Rua Jos Versolato, 111 Conjunto 1509
BRAZIL Torre B - Centro So Bernardo do Campo - SP - Brasil CEP 09750-730 - Tel. (+55) 11 5891 9612
Tel. (+55) 11 5891 9762 Email: comercialbrasil@power-electronics.com
Alonso de Crdova n 5870, Oficina 210-211 Las Condes - Santiago de Chile
CHILE Tel. (+56) 2 3223 8916 Email: ventaschile@power-electronics.com.
Technical assistance: Tel. (+56) 9 9096 9466 Email: satchile@power-electronics.com
Power Electronics Beijing No 28 East Road Beisanhuan 100013, Chaoyang District Beijing
R.P. CHINA Tel. (+86 10) 6437 9197 Fax (+86 10) 6437 9181
CHINA
Power Electronics Asia Ltd 20/F Winbase Centre 208 Queens Road Central HONG KONG
R.P. CHINA Email: sales@power-electronics.com.cn
Terminal Terrestre de Carga, Autopista va Medelln KM 3.5 Costado Sur, Bodega 60, Sector Cota,
COLOMBIA
Bogot Tel. (+57) 322 3464855 Email: ventascolombia@power-electronics.com
Bibiliotque Nationale 2 104 Avenue de France 75013 Paris, France Telf. +33(0)1 46 46 10 34
FRANCE
Ext. 1034. Email: ventesfrance@power-electronics.com
Power Electronics Deutschland GmbH Neuseser Strasse 15 - 90455 Nrnberg
GERMANY
Tel: (+49) 911 99 43 99 0 Fax: (+49) 911 99 43 99 8 Email: info@ped-deutschland.de
Power Electronics Asia HQ Co 953-1 Dokok-dong, Gangnam-gu - 135-270 - Seoul
KOREA
Email: sales@power-electronics.kr
Power Electronics India N5, Cunningham Crescent, 1st floor. Bangalore- 560052
INDIA
Tel: +91 80 6569 0489 Email: salesindia@power-electronics.com
Power Electronics Italia Srl Via Paracelso 16, Palazzo Andromeda 1, Centro Direzionale
ITALY Colleoni - 20864 Agrate Brianza Monza Brianza Tel. +39. 039.9050 899 Email:
infoitalia@power-electronics.com
Power Electronics Japan KK Japan, 2-7-5, Toranomon, Minato-ku, Tokyo, Japan, 105-0001
JAPAN
Burex Toranomon Building 3rd Tel. 03-6206-1145 Fax 03-6206-1175
P.E. Internacional Mexico S de RL Calz. Jinetes #197 - Las Arboledas - Atizapan de Zaragoza
MEXICO 52950, Estado de Mxico Tel. (+52) 55 5390 8818 Tel. (+52) 55 5390 8363
Email: ventasmexico@power-electronics.com
Power Electronics Ekoakua Geea sarl N184 Bloc Hay EL.Massira At Melloul 80150
MOROCCO Agadir Morocco Tel: +212 528 24 04 57 Mob: (+34) 628 11 76 72
Email: ventesmaroc@power-electronics.com
Power Electronics New Zealand Ltd 12A Opawa Road, Waltham Christchurch 8023 P.O.
NEW
Box 1269 Christchurch 8140 Tel. (+64 3) 379 98 26 Fax. (+64 3) 379 98 27
ZEALAND
Email: sales@power-electronics.co.nz
Power Electronics South Africa Pty Ltd Central Office Park Unit 5 257 Jean Avenue
SOUTH
Centurion 0157 Tel. (+34) 96 136 65 57 Fax (+34) 96 131 82 01:
AFRICA
Email: salesza@power-electronics.com
Stora Varvsgatan 13a, 211 75 Malm Tel. 040-35 86 00 Fax 040-93 23 01
SWEDEN
Email: swedensales@power-electronics.com
PERPA Ticaret Merkezi A Blok Kat:2 No:9/0034 34384 Okmeydani Sisli Istanbul Tel. 0 212 221
TURKEY
48 48 (124) Fax.0 212 221 17 00 Email: turkiyesatis@power-electronics.com
UNITED ARAB P.O. Box 487282, 33rd Floor, HDS Business Centre, Plot M1 Jumeirah Lakes Tower, Dubai,
EMIRATES U.A.E. Email: middleeast@power-electronics.com
UNITED Power Electronics Corp UK Ltd Unit 2, Madingley Court, Chippenham Drive, Kingston, Milton
KINGDOM Keynes, MK10 0BZ Tel. (+44) 149 437 0029 Email: uksales@power-electronics.com
UNITED Power Electronics USA Inc. 4777 N 44th Ave Phoenix AZ 85031 USA
STATES Tel: 602-354-4890 Fax: (415) 874-3001 Email: sales@power-electronics.com
www.power-electronics.com

You might also like